Hitachi ink jet printer rx2 s инструкция

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Instruction Manual

INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING

HITACHI  Printer

Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.

This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed

handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or

cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the

printer and use it correctly.

After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.

IF you changed the language of the screen by mistake, see Chapter 7.8 «Selecting Languages».

Model RX2

loading

Summary of Contents for Hitachi RX2

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

Instruction Manual

INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING

HITACHI  Printer

Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.

This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed

handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.

If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or

cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the

printer and use it correctly.

After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.

IF you changed the language of the screen by mistake, see Chapter 7.8 «Selecting Languages».

Model RX2

loading

Summary of Contents for Hitachi IJ RX2-SD160

Download or browse on-line these Instruction Manual for Hitachi RX2 Printer.

Summary of Contents:

[Page 1] Hitachi RX2

HITACHI  Printer Instruction Manual INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING Model RX2 Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2. This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target. This instruction man…

[Page 2] Hitachi RX2

[Page 3] Hitachi RX2

●Safety Precautions (1) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer use. ● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and avo…

[Page 4] Hitachi RX2

(2) ●Safety Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued) WARNING ● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the printer. The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire. Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, …

[Page 5] Hitachi RX2

●Safety Precautions (3) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued) WARNING ● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole in the end of the print head. Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing. …

[Page 6] Hitachi RX2

(4) ●Safety Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued) WARNING ● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or otherwise handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill ink or makeup. If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake…

[Page 7] Hitachi RX2

●Safety Precautions (5) SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued) CAUTION ● Only persons who have completed an operator training course for Hitachi IJP can operate and service the printer. If the printer is operated or serviced incorrectly, it may malfunct…

[Page 8] Hitachi RX2

(6) ●Safety Precautions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued) FCC Notice This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device mu…

[Page 9] Hitachi RX2

●Contents 1 1. USAGE PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.1 Ink and makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 1.2 IJ printer long-term shutdown . . . . . …

[Page 10] Hitachi RX2

2 ●Contents 4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . .4-1 4.1 Print description screen (initial screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen) . . . . . . ….

[Page 11] Hitachi RX2

●Contents 3 3 5. MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1 Confirm the Unit information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2 Monitor operational status . . . . …

[Page 12] Hitachi RX2

4 ●Contents 8. INK AND MAKEUP REPLENISHMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1 8.1 Replenishing the ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.2 Replenishing the makeup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . …

[Page 13] Hitachi RX2

●Ink and makeup 1-1 Storage temperature Shutdown Period Guideline *1 0 to35 C 3 weeks 35 to 40 C 2 weeks 40 to 45 C 1 week 1.1 Ink and makeup (1) Ink and makeup replenishment The printer employs an automatic ink/makeup replenishment system…

[Page 14] Hitachi RX2

1-2 ●Print head cleaning 1.3 Print head cleaning Take the following precautions when cleaning ink from around the nozzle. (1) Orient the end of the print head downward and pour makeup onto the dirty part and clean while catching the makeup i…

[Page 15] Hitachi RX2

●Shutdown 1-3 1.4 Shutdown (no-cleaning stop) When you press the Shutdown on the upper right-hand corner of the screen, the printer stops after completing its automatic nozzle cleaning sequence. If you repeatedly activate the Shutdown …

[Page 16] Hitachi RX2

1-4 ●Cautions on operating time when printer is in service 1.6 Heating of ink (1) If the ambient temperature is under approximately 20 C, the ink is heated by a heating unit in the print head. The startup processing time relative to when not…

[Page 17] Hitachi RX2

●Ink concentration control 1-5 ===== No Ink Concentration Control ===== The current settings have made ink concentration control unavailable. Solution Contact your local distributor. C…

[Page 18] Hitachi RX2

1-6 ●Protection sheet 1.9 Protection sheet A protection sheet is provided to protect the screen display of the IJ printer. This is used to prevent the screen display from becoming dirty, scratched, etc. (1) Installing the protection sheet Clean al…

[Page 19] Hitachi RX2

●External views 2-1 2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 2.1 External views (1) External views Operating status indicator lamps Displays «Ready», «Fault» and «Warning» Handle USB cover Start / Stop switch (*Standard Mo…

[Page 20] Hitachi RX2

2-2 ●Main body internal parts arrangement (2) External views (rear side) 2.2 Main body internal parts arrangement Air-purge connection port Makeup reservoir Ink reservoir Maintenance cover Recovery filter Pressure-reducing valve Ink filter M…

[Page 21] Hitachi RX2

●Print head 2-3 2.3 Print head Print head cover lock thumbscrew Nozzle orifice Minus deflection electrode Gutter Plus deflection electrode Charge electrode

[Page 22] Hitachi RX2

3-1 ●Start operation 3.1 Start operation 3.1.1 Start operation ●The ink and makeup contains organic solvents. When handling the ink and makeup, wear protective gloves and goggles so that the ink will not directly contact your skin. ●An LCD …

[Page 23] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-2 3 Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      100(hours) Print count      …

[Page 24] Hitachi RX2

3-3 ●Start operation 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Com=0 ===== Ink Jet Startup Confirmation ===== The ink jet will be turned ON. Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>. R…

[Page 25] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-4 ● Continuous ejection of ink even though not printing is abnormal. If this occurs, press the Manual . The Manual Control Menu appears. Stop ink ejection by pressing the No-cleaning stop → OK . M Manual 20…

[Page 26] Hitachi RX2

3-5 ●Start operation 3.1.2 When an error occurred at the start of operation Press the Manual . The Manual Control Menu appears. Stop ink ejection by pressing the No-cleaning stop → OK . 1 M Manual 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Shutdow…

[Page 27] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-6 * Thoroughly wipe off the makeup on the surface of each part (including the mounting base) and dry each part thoroughly with wiping paper. Clean the inside of the cleaning section with makeup. Clean the orifice plate, charge e…

[Page 28] Hitachi RX2

3-7 ●Start operation 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Com=0 ===== Ink Jet Startup Confirmation ===== The ink jet will be turned ON. Solution To turn the ink jet ON, press <Ready>. R…

[Page 29] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-8 Confirm that the ink stream is at the center of the gutter. ● Check the position of the ink stream from the sides and top of the print head as shown in the figure and confirm that it is in the center of the gutter. 5 ● If …

[Page 30] Hitachi RX2

3-9 ●Start operation 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Com=0 ===== Manual Control Menu ===== Eject ink Ejects ink while apply- ing no deflection volt- age. Cancel ===== Ink Jet Sta…

[Page 31] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-10 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Com=0 ===== Manual Control Menu ===== Stops ink ejection without cleaning. Cancel ===== Print Abort Confirmation …

[Page 32] Hitachi RX2

3-11 ●Start operation 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Shutdown Com=0 ===== Manual Control Menu ===== Ready The deflection voltage is applied. The printer status becomes Ready. No-cleaning stop Stops …

[Page 33] Hitachi RX2

●Start operation 3-12 3.1.4 Specifying the user (1) Functions ●Specifies the user to be logged in at power-on. ●Selects the user and inputs the password when logging in. ●The administrator defines the user name and password and password prote…

[Page 34] Hitachi RX2

3-13 ●Shut down operation 3.2 Shut down operation 3.2.1 Automatically stopping by pressing one button (RX2-S only) Press the Stop switch. (Press for about 2 seconds.) All operations up to IJ printer power OFF are performed automatically. …

[Page 35] Hitachi RX2

●Shut down operation 3-14 3.2.2 Stopping ink ejection by pressing the screen button ● Perform ink stop processing using the following procedure. 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Shutdown Com=0 ===== Shutdown Process Confirmation …

[Page 36] Hitachi RX2

3-15 ●Shut down operation Turn off method Method which displays a screen at the next operation When the main power switch was turned off after being stopped by Stop switch. Screen is displayed when the startup switch is turned ON after the main …

[Page 37] Hitachi RX2

●Shut down operation 3-16 1. To prevent drying of the nozzle orifice and dust from sticking to the plate during unit storage, the unit is shipped with a “nozzle rubber seal” installed. Remove this “nozzle rubber seal” at installation and …

[Page 38] Hitachi RX2

3-17 ●Basic operation 3.3 Basic operation 3.3.1 Operating Scheme (1) Overall view Print description (Menu 1) Print description (Menu 2) Power ON Power OFF Operation management Select message Over Write message Adjust print parameters Envi…

[Page 39] Hitachi RX2

●Basic operation 3-18 (2) Change message Change message Edit message Print format Print specifications Various print setup Count conditions Calendar conditions Adjust Inter-character space Substitution rules Shift code setup (Op on RX2-S) (Op …

[Page 40] Hitachi RX2

3-19 ●Basic operation (3) Environment setup menu, Auxiliary menu, Maintenance menu Environment setup menu Auxiliary function menu Maintenance menu User environment setup Date / time setup Communication environment setup Touch screen setup Login…

[Page 41] Hitachi RX2

●Basic operation 3-20 Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Message name[           ] 《 》 [Ready     ] Shutdown Com=1 Current user ID : user2 Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Message name[  …

[Page 42] Hitachi RX2

3-21 ●Basic operation 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Message name[           ] 《 》 [Ready       ] Shutdown Warning Print description ◇◇◇◇◇ Ink Low Warning ◇◇◇◇◇ …

[Page 43] Hitachi RX2

●Basic operation 3-22 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 Excitation V-ref. Ref. ambient temperature    Automatic update Incremental change Print trigger source Print data Inc. 1 (0∼19) (℃) 20 (1∼9) 11 Excitation V update [Standby   ] SensorBu…

[Page 44] Hitachi RX2

3-23 ●Basic operation 2 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 Excitation V-ref. Ref. ambient temperature    Automatic update Incremental change Print trigger source Print data Inc. 11 1 20 (1∼9) Data to be displayed For test Sensor Button input Excitation…

[Page 45] Hitachi RX2

●Basic operation 3-24 Date/time setup 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 Current time Calendar time control Calendar time Clock system    24-hour clock clock stop OK 07 2015 (year) 07 (month) (day) 12 45 45 (hour) (minute) (sec…

[Page 46] Hitachi RX2

3-25 ●Basic operation Save message 2015.07.07 12:45 OK Com=0 [Ready      ] Message name [           ] 01 GROUP001 Simple list Save message as (name) Group No. Free space 20% ABC001…

[Page 47] Hitachi RX2

●Basic operation 3-26 Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 文字間調整 Com=0 [ Ready      ] 変更段数指定  横倍角         (横倍 1∼9)  バーコード Message name [           …

[Page 48] Hitachi RX2

4-1 ●Print description screen 4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      �…

[Page 49] Hitachi RX2

●Print description screen 4-2 Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      100(hours) Print count   �…

[Page 50] Hitachi RX2

4-3 ●Edit messages to be printed XY ABCDEFG 2015.12.31 ABCDEFG 2015.12.31 ABCD 2015.12.31 XY EFG 4.2 Edit messages to be printed (Change message screen) (1) Overview ●Edits the…

[Page 51] Hitachi RX2

●Edit messages to be printed 4-4 ●When the Apply is pressed during editing, the input value is applied and reflected in printing. The input value is also applied when returning to the Print description screen by pressing the Back …

[Page 52] Hitachi RX2

4-5 ●Edit messages to be printed Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      100(hours) Print count  �…

[Page 53] Hitachi RX2

●Call and print saved messages 4-6 4.3 Call and print saved messages (1) Overview ●Calls and prints saved messages. ●The message currently being printed is called “Current message”. ●When a message is called during printing, the Print des…

[Page 54] Hitachi RX2

4-7 ●Call and print saved messages Select message 2015.07.07 12:45 OK Com=0 [Stop     ] Details Message name[           ] Group No. Group name [             ]   �…

[Page 55] Hitachi RX2

●Overwrite messages to be printed 4-8 Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      100(hours) Print count �…

[Page 56] Hitachi RX2

4-9 ●Edit messages different from the current message 1 4.5 Edit messages different from the current message (1) Overview ●Edits and saves a specific saved message or a new message. ●Since a message different from the current message (message c…

[Page 57] Hitachi RX2

●Edit messages different from the current message 4-10 1 Create/Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 OK Com=0 [Stop     ] Create new message Details Message name[           ] Group No. Group name [ …

[Page 58] Hitachi RX2

4-11 ●Save created messages 4.6 Save created messages (1) Overview ●Saves created messages. ●A save No. is automatically assigned. ●The same message name cannot be assigned. ●Saving to a selected group is possible. ●Free spaces are displa…

[Page 59] Hitachi RX2

●Save created messages 4-12 Change message 2015.07.07 12:45 Save and Back Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] :Multiple print formats can be mixed. <Format Setup> − + Print format Edit message Pri…

[Page 60] Hitachi RX2

4-13 ●Save created messages Ent Enter Input the message name and press the Enter . A keyboard is displayed. Press Message name. A keyboard is displayed. Save message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[    �…

[Page 61] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-14 Prev.col. Next col. 1st line 2nd line 1st line 2nd line 4.7 Set the print format(Fixed layout) 4.7.1 Select the print items to be edited (1) Selecting one print item ●Sets and changes the print format in…

[Page 62] Hitachi RX2

4-15 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout) Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 Adjustment char. cond. Com=0 [Stop     ]    Bold          (times 1∼9)  Bar code Message name[           ] 1 n…

[Page 63] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-16 Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 Adjustment char. cond. Com=0 [Stop     ] Select Line  Bold          (times 1∼9)  Bar code Message name[          �…

[Page 64] Hitachi RX2

4-17 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout) Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 Adjustment char. cond. Com=0 [Stop     ] Select Line  Bold          (times 1∼9)  Bar code Message name[          �…

[Page 65] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-18 Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 Adjustment char. cond. Com=0 [Stop     ] Select Line  Bold          (times 1∼9)  Bar code Message name[          �…

[Page 66] Hitachi RX2

4-19 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout) Dot matrix ●Sets the character size. 3 Settable sizes (horizontal dots × vertical dots) 4×5, 5×5, 5×8(5×7), 9×8(9×7), 7×10, 10×12, 11�…

[Page 67] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-20 Inter-character space ●Sets the spacing between character and character. 4 ●For user pattern (user pattern), patterns can be designed at the inter-character space part. ●For special characters also, …

[Page 68] Hitachi RX2

4-21 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout) Adjust Inter-character space 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Select line Message name[           ] 1st line Select area Inter-char. space Adjust Inter-character space Col…

[Page 69] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Fixed layout) 4-22 4.7.5 Print a bar code (RX2-S only) (1) Kinds of bar codes ●Different kinds of bar codes can be set for each print item. Kinds of bar codes Bar code Kinds of characters which can be input Remarks Code 39 …

[Page 70] Hitachi RX2

4-23 ●Set the print format (Fixed layout) Print format 2015.07.07 12:45 Adjustment char. cond. Com=0 [Stop     ] Select Line  Bold          (times 1-9)  Bar code  EAN readable code Message name[    …

[Page 71] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-24 Com=0 Bold (times 1∼9) Bar code 1 none Inter-char. space (MAX 0) 1 12×16 Dot matrix Item 1 Usage range  Hor.   60  Vert.   16 − 《 …

[Page 72] Hitachi RX2

4-25 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME 00000 00100 Prev.item abcde fghij klmno Next item abcde fghij klmno Print format [Stop     ] Message name[  �…

[Page 73] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-26 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME Prev.item abcde fghij klmno Next item abcde fghij klmno 00000 00100 Print format [Stop     ] Message name[  …

[Page 74] Hitachi RX2

4-27 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME 00000 00100 Print format [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Bold …

[Page 75] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-28 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME 00000 00100 Print format [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Overall item move Individual…

[Page 76] Hitachi RX2

4-29 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME 00000 00100 Print format [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Bold …

[Page 77] Hitachi RX2

●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4-30 4.8.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters ● Set the dot matrix, inter-character space, bold font, and bar code. ● The methods of setting is the same as fixed layout. S…

[Page 78] Hitachi RX2

4-31 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 4.8.5 Print a bar code ● Set bar code for free layout. ● Basic method of the setting bar code is the same as the method for the fixed layout. See the “4.7.5 Print a bar code” for details…

[Page 79] Hitachi RX2

●Print characters 4-32 4.9 Print characters Ex. Dedicated character (Simple Chinese) Lines and Message length (Characters) Model type 1 line 2 lines 3 lines RX2-B 60 char. × 1 line 30 char. × 2 lines 20 char. × 3 lines RX2-S 120 char. ×…

[Page 80] Hitachi RX2

4-33 ●Print characters Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Print spec. Pint format Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 6 / 1000 A B C D E F G H I J Back space …

[Page 81] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-34 4.10 Use the calendar function 4.10.1 Print calendar characters (1) Calendar characters ●When set as calendar characters, the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second are matched to the current date/time and pri…

[Page 82] Hitachi RX2

4-35 ●Use the calendar function (2) Total number of days ●Use when setting up to print the total number of days from the first of January. ●When set as total date character, it is linked to the calendar time and the print description is changed…

[Page 83] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-36 (4) Week number ●Use week number when printing the week of the year. ●One week begins on Monday and ends on Sunday. ●The week including January 4 of that year shall be week one. Making the week including the fi…

[Page 84] Hitachi RX2

4-37 ●Use the calendar function Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 3 / 1000 A B C D E F G H I J Back space K L M N …

[Page 85] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-38 Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] ← 《 》 110 20 → Prev.item abcde fghij klmno Next item abcde fghij klmno ・ ← → Cancel OK YY.…

[Page 86] Hitachi RX2

4-39 ●Use the calendar function Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 11 / 1000 A B C D E F G H I J Back space K L M N …

[Page 87] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-40 Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] ← 《 》 110 20 → Prev.item abcde fghij klmno Next item abcde fghij klmno YY.MM.DD・ Co…

[Page 88] Hitachi RX2

4-41 ●Use the calendar function 4.10.2 Print future date (offset) (1) Offset function ●Sets the date/time by adding the offset value and the date/time of the internal clock. ●The offset values which can be set are shown in the table below. Offs…

[Page 89] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-42 Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 12 / 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back space + − × / ! Dupli- cate Past…

[Page 90] Hitachi RX2

4-43 ●Use the calendar function Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Substitution rules Column 1 Item 1 Back 《 》 110 20 Prev. Next Y Y.MM.DD h ・ 1st screen 2…

[Page 91] Hitachi RX2

●Use the calendar function 4-44 4.10.3 Print by substituting a different character for the date (substitution rule) (1) Substitution rule function ●Prints the date and time by replacing it with the selected characters. ●One substitut…

[Page 92] Hitachi RX2

4-45 ●Use the calendar function Calendar conditions 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Substitution rules Column 1 Item 1 Back 《 》 110 20 Prev. Next YY.MM.DDh・ 1st screen 2nd …

[Page 93] Hitachi RX2

●Print shift code 4-46 4.11 Print shift code (Optional on RX2-S) (1) Overview ●Divides one day into multiple work shifts and prints a different code for each work shift. (Example) Example of one day divided into 3 work shifts No. Range Print resu…

[Page 94] Hitachi RX2

4-47 ●Print shift code Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 6 / 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back space + − × / ( ) . : , ! Dupli- cat…

[Page 95] Hitachi RX2

●Print shift code 4-48 Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 7 / 1000 A B C D E F G H I J Back space K L M N O P �…

[Page 96] Hitachi RX2

4-49 ●Print shift code When the work shifts exceeded 12 classes, switch using Prev. Dsp. or Next Dsp. . Insertion or deletion can be performed in line units. Shift code setup 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Input …

[Page 97] Hitachi RX2

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-50 4.12 Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) (Optional RX2-S) (1) Overview ●The print contents are updated at a preset update internal (minutes) timing. �…

[Page 98] Hitachi RX2

4-51 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 6 / 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Back space +…

[Page 99] Hitachi RX2

●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) 4-52 Edit message 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Column 1 Item 1 Char. count 7 / 1000 A B C D E F G H I…

[Page 100] Hitachi RX2

4-53 ●Update the print contents at a fixed interval (Time count) Time count conditions 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Duplicate Back 《 》 110 20 FFBC・ Range Reset Reset time…

Table of Contents for Hitachi RX2:

  • ●Set the user environment 6-4 Excitation V-ref. warning ●When the current ambient temperature and the standard ambient temperature (ambient temperature when Excitation V-ref. value was updated) exceeds a certain level, the alarm “Excitation V-ref. Review” occurs. This setting enables/disables that function. ●Setup of enable/disable differs depending on the ink type. Print characters one by one ●Prints only 1 character for each print target detection input. ●Prints one character at a time from the head of the print contents and

  • ●External views 2-1 2. COMPONENT NAMES AND FUNCTIONS 2.1 External views (1) External views Operating status indicator lamps Displays «Ready», «Fault» and «Warning» Handle USB cover Start / Stop switch (*Standard Model only) Main power switch Power lamp Maintenance cover Opened/closed for ink and makeup replacement and other maintenance purposes. Print head This section performs printing.

  • 4-27 ●Set the print format (Free layout; RX2-S only) 2015.07.07 12:45 Com=0 − 《 + 》 Back M Manual Startup Apply HOME 00000 00100 Print format [Stop     ] Message name[           ] Bold (times 1∼9) Bar code 1 none Inter-char. space (MAX 0) 1 12×16 Dot matrix tem position select Item move with button. OK ← → ↓ ↑ Cancel O

  • ●Set the print specifications 4-80 Error correction level Data restoration percentage M Approx. 15% Q Approx. 25% EAN Prefix (RX2-S only) ●Whether to set bar code EAN-13, EAN-8 country code by character input or print format is selected. 3 Number of digits of bar code Country code Data Check digit Total number of digits EAN-13 2 10 1 13 EAN-8 2 5 1 8 EAN Prefix Set value Character input Print format Handling of country code Country code is input at the head of the data. Set by print format without inc

  • ●Appendix 13-2 D Data Entry Confirmation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26, 4-4 Date/time setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19, 3-24, 4-34, 5-6, 6-1, 6-3, 6-9, 9-7, 10-1 Day of the week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34, 4-36, 7-35 Delete colu

  • ●Set up the touch screen 6-10 Setting item Contents Default Display ●Specifies the time the touch screen is turned on. [Note] When turn on in 30 minutes and continuous on were set, the brightness will decrease as the on time accumulates. OFF in 3 min. Keyboard layout ●Changes the keyboard layout. ABC Icon display ●For some buttons, icon display or icon hide is set. Enable Clock display format ●Selects the date format of the clock (current time) displayed at the u

  • ●Confirm the Unit information 5-3 Item Description Ink operating time (variable value) ●Displays the operating time from the last ink replacement. ●At ink replacement, set to “0”. Displays up to 9,999 hours. ●When the Ink alarm time is exceeded, displays an ink replacement alarm message. Ink alarm time ●Displays the time which becomes the ink replacement standard. ●Always displays the standard value. Cumulative op. time ●Dis

  • 4-1 ●Print description screen 4. CREATION AND PRINTING OF MESSAGES Print description 2015.07.07 12:45 M Manual Startup Menu Com=0 [Stop     ] Ink operating time       100(hours) Cumulative op. time      100(hours) Print count         1000(prints) Ink pressure        0.000(MPa;standard value:0.250) Change message Select message Overwrite message Adjust print parameters Ope

  • 4-65 ●Use the count function 4.13.2 Use count multiplication printing (1) Function ●Prints by changing the count value in the specified increments at each printing. ●Multiplies the count value by a predetermined value and prints the result. ●Prints left-justified. ●Matches the decimal part of the product to the number of count digits by rounding off. ●Enables zero-suppression setting for the last 0 after the decimal point. (Example: 1.230 → 1.23) ●When the number of digits of the integer part of the product exceeds th

  • 7-35 ●Editing Substitution Rules Edit substitution rule 2015.07.07 12:45 OK Com=0 [Stop     ] Change rule name Message name [           ] REPLACE001 REPLACE002 REPLACE003 REPLACE004 REPLACE005 REPLACE006 REPLACE007 REPLACE008 REPLACE009 REPLACE010 R�

Questions, Opinions and Exploitation Impressions:

You can ask a question, express your opinion or share our experience of Hitachi RX2 device using right now.

Hitachi IJ RX2 Technical Manual | Manualzz

Technical Manual
INK JET PRINTER FOR INDUSTRIAL MARKING
HITACHI
Printer
Model RX2
Thank you for purchasing the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.
This printer employs a noncontact, ink-jet method to print onto a print target.
This instruction manual describes the basic operating procedures, maintenance procedures, and other detailed
handling procedures of the Hitachi IJ Printer Model RX2.
If the printer is improperly handled or maintained, it may not operate smoothly and may become defective or
cause an accident. It is therefore essential that you read this manual to gain a complete understanding of the
printer and use it correctly.
After thoroughly reading the manual, properly store it for future reference.
IF you changed the language of screen by mistake,see the chapter 7.8 "Selecting Languages".
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
● Before using the printer, thoroughly read the following safety precautions for optimum printer
use.
● You should observe the precautions set forth below in order to use the product properly and
avoid endangering you or other persons or damaging property. For the purpose of clarifying
the severity of injury or damage and likelihood of occurrence, the precautions are classified
into two categories, WARNING and CAUTION, which both describe hazardous situations
that may arise if you ignore the precautions and perform an incorrect handling or operating
procedure. The precautions in these two categories are both important and must therefore
be observed without fail.
WARNING
WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which
may cause severe personal injury or death if the warning against
performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.
CAUTION
CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard which
may cause personal injury or property damage if the warning
against performing an incorrect handling procedure is ignored.
● If the warning in the CAUTION category is ignored, serious results may occur depending on
the situation.
● After the manual has been read, it must be stored in such a location that all printer operation
personnel can refer to it at all times.
● All the instructions set forth in this manual are important and must therefore be observed
without fail.
Pictograph Examples
The symbols are used to indicate precautions (including those related to
potential warnings) to be observed. Detailed information is furnished by a picture
within the symbol outline (a shock hazard is indicated by the example shown at
left).
The symbols are used to describe prohibited actions. The details of a
prohibited action are given by a picture within or near the symbol outline (the
example shown at left dictates that you must keep flames away).
The
symbols are used to describe required actions. Detailed instructions are
given by a picture within the symbol outline (the example shown at left dictates
that a ground connection must be made).
Restrictions on Export
User hereby agrees not to export or re-export this product to any end-user who the user
has reason to suspect may utilize the product for the design, development or reproduction
of nuclear, chemical or biochemical weapons.
File management and USB management are carried out using eParts made from eSOL.
Ethernet is the product name of Xerox Corporation in America.
●Safety Precautions (1)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the
printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas
burners, welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from
open-type relays, switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and
makeup, remove static electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so
on. In the interest of safety, position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the
printer.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at
an adequately ventilated location.
1 Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
2 Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling
with organic solvent vapor.
● Do not insert tweezers, a screwdriver, or any other metal article into the
ink ejection hole in the end of the print head.
When the printer is ready to print, a high voltage (approximately 6 kV) is applied
to the deflection electrode section in the print head.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock, injury, and fire.
● Do not remove the outer covering.
A high voltage is applied to some sections of the printer.
Exercise caution to avoid electric shock and injury.
● Use an AC voltage of 100 to120 V or 200 to 240 V ±10% only and a
power frequency of 50 or 60 Hz only.
If the above requirements are not met, the electric parts may overheat and burn,
creating a risk of fire or electric shock.
● Never drain the ink or makeup waste solution into a public sewer system.
Waste disposal must comply with all appropriate regulations. Consult the
appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● Exercise caution to avoid inadvertently disconnecting, forcibly pulling, or
bending piping tubes.
Since the ink and makeup in some portions of piping tubes are pressurized,
they may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.
(2) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● While the printer is operating, do not look into the ink ejection hole in the
end of the print head.
Ink or makeup may enter your eyes or mouth or soil your hands or clothing.
If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush with warm or
cold water and consult a physician.
● Before servicing the printer, be sure to stop the ink ejection.
Because ink or makeup may splash into your eyes or mouth or onto your hands
or clothing. If any ink or makeup enters your eyes or mouth, immediately flush
with warm or cold water and consult a physician.
● If an earthquake, fire, or other emergency occurs while the printer is
engaged in printing or just turned on, press the Main power switch to turn
off the power.
● The printer must be managed in compliance with all appropriate
regulations.
Read and understand the appropriate Safety Data Sheet (SDS) before using
any ink or makeup.
● Use Hitachi approved consumables and periodic replacement parts.
Using products that are not designated by Hitachi could cause s failure in
certain functions.
● Warning for Mercury
Hg -- THE LAMP IN THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS MERCURY.
RECYCLE OR DISPOSE OF IT ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE
ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS.
For Recycling and Disposal information, contact your government agency, the
Electronic Industries Alliance at www.eiae.org, and/or www.lamprecycle.org (in
the US), or the Electronic Product Stewardship Canada at www.epsc.ca (in
Canada). For more information, call 1-800-HITACHI (1-800-448-2244) (in the
US).
●Safety Precautions (3)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
● When charging a refill of ink or makeup, exchanging ink, or otherwise
handling ink or makeup, take enough care not to spill ink or makeup.
If you spill any ink or makeup by mistake, wipe it off neatly and promptly with
wiping paper or something similar. Do not close the maintenance cover until
you make sure that the portion you have just wiped is completely dry.
You must pay particular attention when you have spilled ink or makeup inside
the printer and it is not completely dry. Why? Because vapors of ink or
makeup will stay inside the printer and may catch on or cause a fire.
If you find it hard to wipe the printer when it is turned on, stop it with the
maintenance cover open. Power it down, and then wipe it off again.
● If you wish to clean the casing of the printer with wiping paper impregnated
with makeup, be sure to do so with the power off.
Attempting to clean it when the power is on will cause makeup or vapors of makeup
to enter the printer, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
When the cleaning is over, open the maintenance cover and make sure that no
makeup has entered and no vapors remain inside.
● Should you find a leak of ink or makeup inside the printer while the printer is
running or being maintained, wipe it off promptly with wiping paper or
something similar. Then, with the maintenance cover open, stop the printer,
power it down, and repair the leak.
Continuing operation with a leak of ink or makeup will cause an anomaly,
resulting in abnormal printing.
Ink and makeup are flammable. They may therefore catch on or cause a fire.
● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty
containers are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate
regulations. Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● If you wish to receive ink particles in a beaker, for a printing test for example,
use an electrically conductive beaker and connect the beaker securely to the
ground.
Do not let the tip of the printing head enter the beaker.
Ink particles used for printing are electrically charged. An ungrounded beaker has a
gradually rising charge, possibly catching on or causing a fire.
● Ensure that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with
applicable cords. Properly connect the printer to its dedicated ground.
Complete the above procedure to avoid electrical shock hazards.
● When welding, keep enough space between the IJ printer and the welding
work area to prevent the arc from starting a fire. Also, be sure to insulate the
printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current from flowing to the
control section of the printer, and to make a separate ground connection for
the printer.
(4) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
WARNING
<Keep all fire away.>
○ Ink and Makeup are flammable.
○ All fire must be kept away from the machine.
○ Spilled Ink and Makeup must be wiped off and dried up immediately.
<Caution when handling Ink/Makeup>
○ Strage must comply with local regulatory requirements .
○ Read and understand Safety Data Sheet(SDS).
○ Be sure to wear protective gloves and safety goggies.
○ If the Ink/Makeup in used is an organic solvent,it must be managed in compliance with the
Ordinance on the prevention or Organic Solvent poisoning.Refer to the "Instruction Manual"and
the "Handling guidance of each ink" for details.
AVERTISSEMENT
< Tenir hors de portée du feu. >
○ L’encre et la composition sont inflammables.
○ Tenir la machine hors de portée du feu.
○ Nettoyez et séchez immédiatement les projections d’encre et de composition.
<Soyez prudent lorsque vous manipulez l’encre/la composition>
○ Le stockage doit respecter les obligations réglementaires locales.
○ Lisez attentivement la fiche signalétique de sécurité de l’appareil (FSSP).
○ Assurez-vous de porter des gants et des lunettes de protection.
○ Si l’encre/la composition utilisée est un solvant biologique, vous devez le manipuler
conformément au décret sur la prévention des empoisonnements par solvant biologique.
Reportez-vous au «Mode d’emploi» et aux «Conseils de manipulation de chaque type d’encre»
pour plus de détails.
●Safety Precautions (5)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
CAUTION
● Only persons who have completed an operator training course for
Hitachi IJP can operate and service the printer.
If the printer is operated or serviced incorrectly, it may malfunction or break
down.
● Do not attempt to make repairs for any purpose other than operation or
maintenance.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, observe the
following handling precautions.
1 Secure adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer
installation site. At least 200 m3 must be provided per print head.
Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided.
2 When handling the ink or makeup, wear protective gloves and safety goggles
to avoid direct skin contact. If the ink or makeup comes into contact with
skin, wash thoroughly with soap and warm or cold water.
3 When transferring the ink or makeup to or from a bottle, exercise caution to
prevent it coming into contact with the printer or surrounding articles.
If there is any spillage, immediately wipe it clean using a cloth moistened
with makeup.
● Ink and makeup must be stored as flammable liquids. Storage must
comply with local regulatory requirements. Consult the appropriate
regulatory agency for further information.
● If extraneous noise enters the printer, it may malfunction or break down.
For maximum noise immunity, observe the following installation and wiring
precautions.
1 Ensure that 100 to 120 VAC or 200 to 240 VAC power cables are not
bundled with other power supply cables.
2 Insulate the printer main body and print head so that they do not come into
direct contact with the conveyor or other devices.
3 If the employed print target detector is housed in a metal case, use a plastic
mounting brace for the purpose of insulating the detector from the conveyor
and other devices.
4 Be sure that the print target detector wiring is not bundled together with other
power supply cables.
● Please make sure the print status and print content are correct each time when
you start operation of IJP.
● Please implement periodical checkup of print status in the process, even
including during production.
● A touch panel is employed for data entry to operation screen.
When manipulating the Touch panel, use only fingers. If the touch panel is
operated with metal and/or sharp objects such as ball point pen, it may
malfunction or break down.
(6) ●Safety Precautions
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Continued)
FCC Notice
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
●Safety Precautions (7)
CONTENTS
1. DELIVERED GOODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. INSTALLING PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. INSTALLATION CHECK ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1 Print head air purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 Setting functions which can be performed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 Password protection will be canceled in units of Print item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.3 Selecting user when power is turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.4 The state where the administrator login is returned automatically . . . . . . 3-11
4. ELECTRIC SIGNAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.1 Wiring precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Input/output (I/O) signal connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Wiring the I/O line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.2 Connection to input/output (I/O) terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.3 Input/output (I/O) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.3.1 Print target detector input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.3.2 Product speed matching function using a rotary encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
4.3.3 Input function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
4.3.4 Output function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder (RX2-S only) . . . . . . . . 4-25
5. COMMUNICATION (Optinal on RX2-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 Setting Communication Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.1 Setting Communication Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.2.2 Transmission Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.3 Transmission Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.1 Common Transmission Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.3.2 Printings Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.3.3 Print Data Recall Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
5.3.4 Print data registration transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
5.3.5 Print Condition Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5.3.6 Free Layout Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
5.3.7 Calendar Conditions Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
5.3.8 User Pattern Character Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
●Contents 1
5.3.9 On-line/Off-line Transmission Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
5.3.10 Remote Operation Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
5.3.11 Time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
5.4 Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.1 Code Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
5.4.2 Header Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
5.5 Communication Timing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.5.1 Signal Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
5.5.2 Response Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51
5.6 Communication Monitor Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
5.7 Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
5.8 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.8.1 Notes on Product speed matching Feature Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.8.2 Notes on Print Condition Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61
5.9 Communication Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.9.1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
5.9.2 Description of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-63
5.9.3 External Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
5.9.4 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-67
6. CIRCULATION SYSTEM WORK AND ADJUSTMENT
METHOD . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
6.1 Circulation control screen operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Circulation control contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Replacing the ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.1 Nozzle backwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.5 Stream alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6.6 Cleaning the Gutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6.7 Replacing the ink filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.8 Replacing the recovery filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
6.9 Replacing the circulation filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
6.10 Adjusting the pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6.11 Excitation V adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.12 Ink drop state check method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
2 ●Contents
6.15 Long-term Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
6.15.1 Process prior to long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
8. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.1 Outside Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 Electrical Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Circulation System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
9. APPENDIX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
● Barcode, 2-dimensional code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
● Setting high-speed printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
● Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
● Icon List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
● Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
●Contents 3
1. DELIVERED GOODS
●Unpack the equipment and check the delivered goods.
No.
Part Name
Qty
Product code.
1
IJ printer body
1
-
2
Basic Operation manual
1
-
3
Manual CD
1
-
4
One-page sheet
1
-
Remarks
Used in ink particles shape
check, ink beam position check,
etc.
5
Magnifying glass
1
451274
6
Tweezers
1
451412
Used when removing the
orifice, etc.
7
Cleaning bottle
1
451058
Filled with makeup and used in
print head cleaning, etc.
8
Beaker with handle
1
451410
Used in print head cleaning, ink
replacement, etc.
9
Wide mouth bottle
1
451126
Use to hold the waste liquid.
10 Wiping paper
1
-
11 Nozzle flat filter 75
1
451037
Spare part.
Recovery system filter.
1
450214
Spare part.
For recovery system filter
sealing.
1
451589
An O ring for the orifice plate
seal (spare part).
Use for wiping after print head
cleaning, etc.
φ16
12 O-ring P12
φ16.6
13 O-ring SF7000-5.6
φ7.2
1-1 ●Delivered goods
No.
Part Name
14 Cable seal
Qty
Product code
Remarks
3
-
Seal for power cable and
external communications cable.
15 Cable clip
1
-
16 Plastic bag with zipper
1
-
Cable clip
Nozzle rubber seal
One page sheet
Use to store the one page
sheet and nozzle rubber seal.
17 Drainage tube
1
451676
18 Signal tower holder
1
-
Used for ink replacement and
filter replacement.
Signal tower
Holder plate
(Packing)
19 Signal tower holder plate
1
Holder
Used for attaching the signal
tower.
Note “Part Name” and “Product code” when ordering the parts.
●Delivered goods 1-2
2. INSTALLING PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
● Ensure that there is no flame- or arc-generating device around the printer.
The ink and makeup are both flammable and may cause fire.
Fire can be generated by matches, lighters, cigarettes, heaters, stoves, gas burners,
welders, grinders and static electricity. Arcs may be generated from open-type relays,
switches, and brush motors. Before handling the ink and makeup, remove static
electricity from your body, peripheral equipment, and so on. In the interest of safety,
position a dry-chemical fire extinguisher near the printer.
● Since the ink and makeup contain organic solvents, install the printer at an
adequately ventilated location.
1 Never install the printer in an enclosed space.
2 Connect exhaust equipment to the printer in order to prevent it from filling with
organic solvent vapor.
CAUTION
● The employed ink and makeup contain organic solvents. Furnish an
adequate space for the ink/makeup handling area and printer
installation site. A space of at least 200 m3 must be provided per print head.
Ensure that adequate ventilation is provided. Follow all regulation in your
country.
(1) Provide a clearance around the IJ printer for daily operation,
300mm
Maintenance area
handling, and maintenance access (see the figure at right).
(2) The print head needs to be cleaned with the makeup while the
300
300
printer is operated and stopped (daily maintenance). Adopt a fixed
mm
mm
structure in consideration of print head cover and print head
IJ printer
removal.
(3) Installation must be completed so that no vibration will be applied to
the IJ printer main body, print head, or print head cable.
750mm
If they are vibrated, print quality deterioration and print irregularity
Top view
may be incurred (the maximum permissible vibration value is
1.96m/s 2 ).
* Leave a maintenance area of
(4) The IJ printer main body must be installed with a levelness error of
at least 20 cm for the upside
not over ±1°.
of printer.
(5) The IJ printer main body must be electrically insulated from the
other equipment (conveyors, packing machines,etc.), photoelectric
switches, and the rotary encoder.
(6) The standard distance between the printing head and the object to be
Distance between the printing head
printed on is as indicated in the right-hand table.
and the object to be printed on
The smaller the clearance between the print head and print target,
the smaller the character height and the better printing.
Nozzle diameter
Distance
(7) The IJ printer proper requires maintenance as the occasion may
10 to 30mm
65μm
demand including replenishment of ink and makeup and
replacement of filter.
(8) If ambient humidity is 85 to 90%RH, you must purge inside of print
head by air.
It is necessary for dry-clean air, regulator for pressure of air and air
filter.
(Quantities of the air are 1L / minutes.)
2-1 ●Installing Precautions
(9) When installing the print head and print head cable, comply with the following conditions.
1 When positioning the end of the print head above the printer main body installation surface,ensure
that the distance between the end of the print head and the installation surface does not exceed 1.5 m.
2 When positioning the end of the print head below the printer main body installation surface, ensure
that the distance between the end of the print head and the installation surface does not exceed 1 m.
Print head cable
IJ printer
main body
Print head
1.5m
Main body installation surface
1m Print head
cable included
Upward printing
Lateral printing
Downward printing
(10) When using the printer for upward or lateral printing, ensure that the rising print head cable upper end
is positioned not more than 0.5 m above the print head.
Print head cable
Bend R
0.5m
Print head
(11) If you fixed the print head, ensure that the minimum bend radius of the print head cable is at least 150 mm.
Handle the headcable with care when wiring it.
If the minimum bend radius is less than 150mm, the tubes and wires inside the headcable might be broken.
(12) The ink stream may bend for some reason or other (due, for instance, to dirt).
The facilities positioned in the direction of ink ejection should be partially covered as needed to avoid ink
accumulation.
(13) When connecting an exhaust duct to the printer, install a damper and adjust the wind velocity at the intake
port to 0.3 to 0.5 m/s. (Use an anemometer for verification. If the wind velocity is too high, the makeup
consumption increases.)
Connect a duct to this port
(50 mm in diameter).
Exhaust duct
connection port
●Installing Precautions 2-2
(14) If you try to fix the print head with a magnetic substance (such as iron), the cover switch will
malfunction resulting in an "Cover Open" error.
This, you must only use nonmagnetic resins or metals for fixing the print head.
(15) In the case of carrying the printer proper, use the handles in the drawing below.
2-3 ●Installing Precautions
3. INSTALLATION CHECK ITEMS
3.1 Print head air purge
If the makeup remains in the electrode section after cleaning or if you use the IJ
printer at a high humidity, moisture condensation may occur within the print head,
causing leakage from the deflection electrode section. It is also important to
remember that dust or splashed ink accumulation on the deflection electrode
section may cause leakage. Performing the following air purge procedure for the
print head interior is effective in preventing such leakage.
(1) Situations requiring an air purge
1 When the printer is used in a highly humid place such as a beer or other beverage can line
(If you use the printer in an environment in which the relative humidity is 85% or higher,
complete the print head air-purge procedure).
2 When a water drainage blow sequence is performed before printing.
3 When the printer is used in a place where a considerable amount of paper powder or other dust
exists.
4 When the printing distance is short so that the end of the print head is splashed with ink.
5 When you use inks that are indicated on the handling guidance of each ink to complete
air-purge procedure.
(2) Air-purging procedure
Introduce clean dry air into the print head air purge connection port (Rc 1/8 (PT 1/8)×screw) in
the rear of the printer main body at a pressure of about 0.1 to 0.3 MPa. If it is possible that the
employed air tanks oil or water, turn it into clean dry air with an air filter, micro-mist separator, or
the like before introducing it into the printer main body.
Back of body
Pressure gauge
0.1〜0.3MPa
Air source
(clean dry air)
Pressure reducing valve
(capacity: Approx. 1L/min)
Print head air purge
connection port
Made of resin. Be careful not to
tighten too tightly when connecting
with a metal joint.
Max. tightening torque:1.5N.m
NOTICE
If the air-purge amount is excessive, print irregularities may occur.
After air-purge pressure adjustment, be sure to perform a printing test to
verify the printing results.
●Print head air purge 3-1
3.2 Setting functions which can be performed
4
(1) Functions
●Sets whether or not each function is enabled or disabled for each login user.
●The operation buttons of disabled functions are not displayed or the screen cannot be entered.
●”User conditions setup” and “Using environment setup” can be started when the administrator logs in.
●The function restrictions state can be checked at the function restrictions screen. (Refer to “Instruction
manual 5.5 Checking functions that can be performed”)
Protected functions
Item
Protected function name
Edit message
●Edit message
●Calendar conditions
●Substitution rules setting
●Count conditions
Select message
●Select message
Save message
●Save message
●Overwrite message
●Print specifications
Print specifications ●Various print setup
●Adjust print parameters
Print format
Maintenance
Password setup
●Print format
●Adjust inter-character space
[Auxiliary functions]
●Manage messages/group
●Create user pattern
●Calibrate touch screen coordinates
●Copy data (IJP→USB)
●Copy data (USB→IJP)
●Edit standard pattern
●Edit substitution rules
●Select language
●Password setup
3-2 ●Setting functions which can be performed
[Environment setup]
●User environment setup
●Date/time setup
●Communication environment setup
●Touch screen setup
[Maintenance work]
●Operation management
●Excitation V update
●Circulation control
●Solenoid valve/pump test
(2) Operation
The administrator is logged in.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Log in as a user with administrator rights when User conditions setup or Using environment setup are
not displayed on Login management menu.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Delete the user.
Create the new user.
2 Press User conditions setup .
The User conditions setup screen is displayed.
A user list is displayed.
User conditions setup
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID : admin
admin
user2
user4
user5
user3
user5
Back
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-3
3 Select user5 .
“user5” settings are displayed.
User conditions setup
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Modifies the user
name.
ID:5
Displays the kind
of administrator
rights.
Sets function
restrictions.
user5
M
Administrator
Administrator rights
Users
Edit message
access
protect
Select message
access
protect
Save message
access
protect
Print specifications
access
protect
Print format
access
protect
Maintenance
access
protect
Password update
access
protect
Manual Startup
HOME
Cancel
Password
setup
OK
Password
setup
OK
4 Select the administrator rights.
5 Select “access” or “protect” for each function item.
6 Press Password setup and set the password.
An error message appears when the entry in the old password input field does not agree
with the current password.
However, the error does not occur if you type in "IGNOREPW" as the password.
Use this word if you forget your password.
7 Press OK .
The administrator rights, function restrictions, user name, and password for user “user5” are set.
3-4 ●Setting functions which can be performed
3.2.1 Password protection will be canceled in units of Print item
(1) General
●When Password protection is valid, it can be canceled in units of Print item.
●When Administrator logs in, Password protection can be canceled.
(2) Operation
●The character input is made as follows.
(Column 1)
USE
BY ・
(Column 2)
14.02.20・
●For “user5” whose “Administrator rights” is “Users", set “Edit message” to “protect”.
●Password protection for Column 2 will be canceled.
1 Administrator logs in.
2 As described in Section 3.2 “Setting functions which can be performed”, make
“User conditions setup” enabled for “user5” and set “Edit message” to “protect”.
At this time, Administrator still logs in.
3 Return to “Print description” screen from “Login management menu”.
Change message
Change
message
Select
message
Overwrite
message
Adjust print
parameters
Operation
management
Menu
4 Press Change message on “Print description” screen.
“Change message” screen will be displayed.
Edit message
Print
format
Edit
message
Print
spec.
Various
print setup
<Format Setup>
Individual
setup
:Multiple print formats can be mixed.
Overall
setup
:Character size and inter-character space set
value are matched at all lines.
Only 1 column can be input.
Free layout
:An arbitrary position can be set for each print
item.
Save and Back
Back
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-5
5 Press Edit message on “Change message” screen.
“Edit message” screen will be displayed.
Edit message
[Stop
Message name[SAMPLE
1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
+
USE BY
abcde
fghij
klmno
14.02.20
abcde
fghij
klmno
Prev.item
Next item
《 ←
123‥
Sign
1
2
1
10
20
USE BY ・
‥ Calendar etc.
ABC… ★◎
Logo
/count
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
▽
0
+ − × / ( ) . : , !
"
# $ % & ¥ '
■
[ ]
= ? < > ; * _
Space
→
》
Delete Back space
OverInsert write
Duplicate Paste
Cal.
cond.
Count
cond.
Startup
HOME
Column 1
Item 1
Char. count
15 / 120
Pint
format
Print
spec.
Password
protection
Password protection
Back
6 Press Password protection on “Edit message” screen.
“Password protection” screen will be displayed.
The character input of all the items is restricted by showing shaded characters.
The cursor is placed on Column 1.
Password protection
Message name[SAMPLE
[Stop
1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
+
USE BY
14.02.20
Prev.item
Startup
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Next item
Next item
protect
access
protect all
Back
3-6 ●Setting functions which can be performed
7 Press Next item .
The cursor moves to Column 2.
Password protection
Message name[SAMPLE
[Stop
1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
Manual
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
+
USE BY
14.02.20
Startup
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Prev.item
Next item
protect
access
access
protect all
Back
8 Press access .
Password protection where the cursor is placed will be canceled and the character’s shade will
disappear.
The character input will be available on Column 2.
Password protection
Message name[SAMPLE
[Stop
1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
M
−
abcde
fghij
klmno
+
USE BY
14.02.20
Prev.item
Manual
Startup
Apply
HOME
HOME
abcde
fghij
klmno
Apply
Next item
protect
access
protect all
Back
9 Press Apply .
All inputs which are set on “Password protection” screen will be applied.
10 Press HOME .
It will return to “Print description” screen.
11 Log in as “user5” on “Select login user” screen.
Administrator rights “Users” is now applied.
The character input will be available ONLY on Column 2 on “Edit message” screen.
●Setting functions which can be performed 3-7
(3) Supplemental explanation
●The print data which was just edited shall be saved. After saved, when the data is selected, the character
input will be available ONLY on Column 2.
● In case the number of Print lines is changed by Print format, the character input of ALL print items will
be restricted. IJP status will return to default of “before Password protection canceled”.
3-8 ●Setting functions which can be performed
3.3 Selecting user when power is turned on
(1) Functions
●Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when power is turned on.
Possible login methods
Login method “Disable”
Login method “Enable”
Immediately displays the Print
Operation when power is description screen when the power
turned on
is turned on. The login user is
decided beforehand.
Selects the user which logs in when
the power is turned on.
●The login user can be changed by login user change function even when the login method is “Disable”.
●”User conditions setup” and “Using environment setup” can be started when the administrator is logged in.
(2) Operation
Log in the administrator.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Create the new user.
Delete the user.
●Selecting user when power is turned on 3-9
2 Press Using environment setup .
The Using environment setup screen is displayed.
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Com=0
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
admin
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
Cancel
OK
3
OK
Press Login method Enable .
When "Enable" is selected,
selects the user which logs
in when the power is turned
on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Disable Enable
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect Disable Enable
Cancel
OK
OK
4 Select the login method and press OK .
Sets whether or not to select a user which logs in when power is turned on.
CAUTION
When the Login method is "Enable", the Select login user screen is displayed when the power is turned
on. At this time, if the set password is forgotten, the program will not advance to the print description
screen. Set and manage the password carefully.
If you forget the password, consult your nearest local distributor.
3-10 ●Selecting user when power is turned on
3.4 The state where the administrator login is returned automatically
(1) Function details
●In case that Administrator logged in to printer and left the screen untouched for 15 minutes, the new
function will switch the login condition to Users from Administrator.
●Flow diagram below shows the steps of switching to User login condition.
Did any User login after
the power on?
YES
NO
YES
Is "Login method" set to
[Enable]?
NO
NO
Is [Default login ID] set to
[Users]?
YES
Switch to User of the
smallest number.
Switch to User of
[Default login ID.]
Switch to User who last
logged in.
(2) Working conditions
●The working conditions of this new function are listed in Table1 below.
Only when all the conditions are met, this new function will work.
Table 1. Model combinations where Copy data is available
No.
Working conditions
1 "Administrator Automatic Deselect" is set to [Enable].
2 One or more than one user are registered as the Login user.
One of the menus below appears on the screen.
(Print description, Change message, Print format, Adjust Inter-character space, Edit message,
3 Count conditions, Print specifications, Various print setup, Save message, Select message,
Adjust print parameters, Operation management, Maintenance menu, Aux. function menu,
Environment setup menu)
4 [Apply] key does not appear on the screen.
● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically 3-11
(2) Operation
Log in the administrator.
1 Press Login management of the Environment setup menu.
The Login management menu is displayed.
Login management menu
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Startup
Sets function
restrictions for
each user.
Sets whether or
not to select a
user which logs
in when power
is turned on.
Login history
Select login user
Password setup
HOME
User conditions
Using environment
setup
setup
Create new user ID
Delete user ID
Sets the password.
Back
Delete the user.
Create the new user.
2 Press Using environment setup .
The Using environment setup screen is displayed.
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
admin
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
When "Disable" is selected,
it does not return a user
automatically.
Cancel
OK
3-12 ● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically
OK
3
Press Administrator Automatic Deselect Enable .
When "Disable" is selected,
the Print description screen
is immediately displayed
when the power is turned on.
Using environment setup
Login method
[Stop
]
Disable Enable
Default login ID : 1
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Admin
Manual Startup
HOME
Administrator Automatic Deselect
Disable Enable
Specifies the login user
Cancel
When "Enable" is selected,
it does return a user
automatically.
OK
OK
4 Select the Administrator Automatic Deselect and press OK .
Administrator Automatic Deselect is set up.
● The state where the administrator logs in is returned automatically 3-13
4. ELECTRIC SIGNAL CONNECTION
4.1 Wiring precautions
(1)If noise enters the IJ printer from the outside, there is the danger of erroneous operation or trouble.
To improve noise resistance, perform wiring work as follows:
1 Separate the power cable to the IJ printer from other power lines for powering use (especially, power
line for a speed control inverter, etc.).
Wiring the power cable through a separate duct is even better.
2 Do not bundle input/output (I/O) signal wiring together with other power lines. Wire them
independently instead.
3 Electrically isolate the print target detector, print head, stand, and IJ printer body from other
machinery and equipment (conveyor, etc.).
4 Separate the print target detector wiring from other power lines.
5 Perform that all electrical wiring, connections and grounding comply with applicable cords.
(When erroneous operation was caused by noise, etc., use a dedicated ground.)
Print target
Stand
Conveyor
Print head
IJ printer body
Print stop
Ready
3
4
Print target detector
5 Ground
M
1 Primary power source
Motor power line
(2) Connection to power supply
Use a suitable plug and always connect the power source to a protective ground. In addition, arrange the
receptacles near the IJ printer so that removal is easy.
4-1 ●Wiring precautions
(3) Precautions related to welding current of welder
Signal (weak electric) ground and frame ground are connected because the ink drops of the IJ printer
are electrically charged.
Nozzle Ink column Charge electrode
+++
+++
The ink drops are electrically charged by impressing a voltage between the charging electrode and ink column as
shown at the left.
Therefore, the ink always becomes signal ground.
In addition, since the ink is always connected to frame
ground by the clamp, etc. of the circulation path, separating
signal ground and frame ground is difficult.
Signal ground
Charge theory
Therefore, when a large current (for example, the welding current of a welder) flows from the
outside through frame ground, the current is also diverted to signal ground and the PC boards may
be damaged. For this reason, when performing welding work near the IJ printer, proceed as follows:
Method
Be sure to insulate the printhead and IJ printer frame to keep the welding current from flowing to
the control section of the printer, and to make a separate ground connection for the printer.
If this method is used, welding work becomes possible even while the IJ printer is operating.
IJ printer body frame
Print head unit
Primary power cable
Stand (option)
E
Spaced by insulator
Welding work cautions
WARNING
●Fire is strictly forbidden around the IJ printer
The ink and makeup are both flammable. Welding sparks may cause ignition or a fire.
Take measures so that sparks do not enter the surrounding area whether or not the IJ
printer is operating, and ventilate sufficiently.
Just in case, ensure safety by installing a powder type fire extinguisher nearby.
●Wiring precautions 4-2
4.2 Input/output (I/O) signal connection
4.2.1 Wiring the I/O line
Open the top cover and run the I/O line wiring from the lead-in port on the side and connect it to external
connection terminal boards 1 and 2 and the external communications connector inside the IJ printer.
CAUTION
When performing wiring work, always turn off the power.
During normal use, leave the top cover closed.
Ethernet communication connector
(Option: Depending on models)
Terminal blocks 1
Lead-in Port
Communication connector (Optional on RX2-B)
[Lead-in port]
W
H
Name
For separate code
d
Cable outside
diameter range Size/Dimension
φ4.5〜10(M16)
For external communications φ3.5〜10
For print target detector/
φ3.5〜7(M12)
for encoder
For reciprocative printing,
Print-in-progress,
φ4.5〜10(M16)
Print.complete, print stop,
online, remote signal
For Ready, Fault, Warning
φ4.5〜10(M16)
19(d)
38(W)×17(H)
15(d)
19(d)
19(d)
CAUTION
Use cables with an outside diameter within the range specified above. Firmly tighten
the lead-in port lock nut.
In addition, do not bundle weak electric system and strong electric system cables
together inside and outside the IJ printer so that the weak electric system signals
(signals to terminal board 1 and external communication connector) are not affected by
strong electric system signals (power source).
Especially, absolutely never bundle together the print target detector and print stop
signals and the power source and Ready to print signal cable and do not wire them
inside the same duct.
4-3 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
Lead-in port connection method
Set screw
[Lead-in port]
Cable seal block
Cable seal block
Seal
Lock nut
Cable
Seal
Cable
1 Remove the lock nut.
2 Pass the cable through as shown
in the figure.
3 Tighten the lock nut.
Tighten the lock nut securely
using a tool.
(
)
1 Remove the set screw and remove
the cable seal block from the body.
2 Separate the cable seal block.
3 Wrap the outside of the cable with
seal as shown in the figure.
Wrap the seal so that there is
no gap between it and the cable
seal block.
4 Reassemble the cable seal block by
following the opposite procedure.
(
)
●Input/output (I/O) signal connection 4-4
4
4.2.2 Connection to input/output (I/O) terminals
[Overview of Terminals and Connectors]
The terminal blocks and connectors for wiring are located behind the electrical access door (upper
front panel door).
External connection
terminal block1
TB1
Communication connector
CAUTION
Faulty wiring causes the substrate breakdown.
Before wiring, be sure to confirm the terminal signal.
[Usage for the External connection terminal block 1 (TB1)]
● Applicable cable size
: AWG24 to 16 (Φ0.5 to 1.3)
● Wire covering to be stripped : 8 to 9 mm
Wire (Twist the wire.)
1 Press
Stripped
2 Insert
Terminal block
(TB1)
4-5 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
[ Connection to the external connection terminal block (TB1 of EZJ127 P.W.B) ]
● The I/F signal with conveyer is connected.
● NPN/PNP interface can be selected for the print target detector and a part of I/O signals.
● Totem pole/Open collector(NPN) can be selected for the encoder signal.
● Pin #4, #5 and #14 to 23 --- RX2-S:Standard, RX2-B: Option
Pin
No.
Name
NPN Interface
Input/output
PNP Interface
NPN
PNP
1
Power supply for Print target detector
Output
2
Print target detector
3
Ground for Print target detector
4
Print stop
5
Signal ground
6
Power supply for encoder
7
Encoder signal (Totem pole)
Input
8
Encoder signal (Open collector NPN)
Input
9
Ground for Encoder
● DC24V, 100mA max. (*1)
● Power supply, NPN / PNP can be selected
by SW1.
Input
Input
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
Output
● DC24V, 100mA max. (*1)
● Totem pole / Open collector (NPN) can
be selected by SW1
● Power supply can be selected by SW1
-
10 Ready
-
Output
-
11 Signal ground
-
-
-
12 Fault
-
Output
-
13 Warning
-
Output
-
14 Deflection voltage ON/OFF signal
Input
15 Reciprocative print signal
Input
16 Run signal
Input
17 Reset signal
Input
18 Stop signal
Input
19 Print-in-progress / Print-complete
Output
20 Online output
Output
21 Universal output 1
Output
22 Universal output 2
Output
23 Signal ground
Remarks
● Open collector (NPNn) only.
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
● Print-in-progress/ Print-complete can be
selected with screen operation.
● NPN / PNP can be selected by SW2
● RX2-S: Standard, RX2-B: Option
-
(*1): The supplying power capacity for print target detector and encoder is up to 100mA in total.
●Input/output (I/O) signal connection 4-6
SW1
EZJ127 board
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
SW2
Input : NPN
Output : NPN
SW1
Input : PNP
Output : PNP
ON
OFF
SW2
Input : NPN
Output : PNP
Input : PNP
Output : NPN
ON
OFF
(Precautions when using combination of NPN/PNP interfaces)
● Use either NPN or PNP interface for input/output signals #4 to 5 and #14 to 23. Do not use a
combination of the interfaces for these input/output signals.
● Interfaces can be combined for units of print material sensor signals (#1 to 3), encoder signals (#6 to 9),
input/output signals (#4 to 5, #14 to 18) and status output signals (#19 to 22).
(For example, PNP interface can be used for print target detector and NPN interface can be used for
status output signals (#19 to 22).
4-7 ●Input/output (I/O) signal connection
4.3 Input/output (I/O) specifications
When handling external signals, observe the voltage, current, and time given in this manual.
Operation is not guaranteed if external signals are not handled properly.
[Input / Output Signal Specifications]
(1) Input signals (external device →IJ printer)
No. Signal name
1
Print object
detection
2 Printing stop
Function
Indicates the arrival of a print object.
Issues instructions so that printing does
not start even if a print object is
detected.
Issues instructions so as to change the
Reciprocative order of characters to be printed.
3
printing
OFF:Transport in normal direction
ON :Transport in reverse direction
4
5
6
7
8
Encoder
(for speed
follow-up)
Makes a pulse entry in proportion to the
print object transport speed.
Functionally the same as the RUN key
on the operator panel.
Run *2)
Performs processing from "ink
injection" to "ready to print"
Functionally the same as the Reset key
and the Message Delete key on the
Reset
Error Message window.
Resets an error.
Functionally the same as the STOP key
on the operator panel.
Stop
Stops injection of ink (automatic
flushing).
Functionally the same as the Deflection
Voltage Control function in a message
which appears when the CONTROL
High voltage
key on the operator panel is pressed.
ON/OFF
The deflection voltage is turned on
(Ready) and off (Standby) alternately
each time this signal is entered.
Electrical characteristics
+NPN input
PNP input
+24 V output (Up to 100mA *1)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 12 mA max.; I in(at24V): 12 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
+24 V output (Up to 100mA *1)
NPN open collector Totem pole
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 20mA max.; I in(at24V): 20mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
V in: 1V max. *3)
ON state :
I out : 6 mA max.;
OFF state:
Vout : 24 V *3)
ON state :
I in(at24V): 6 mA max.
OFF state:
V in: 1V max. *3)
*1) The current supply capacity of +24V for Print object detector and encoder is up to 100mA in total.
*2) RUN signal instructs to inkjet ink. Handle the signal with care.
*3) Ensure that the external device transistor leak current doesn't exceed 0.1mA while the input signal is OFF.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-8
(2) Output signals (IJ printer →external device)
No.
Signal name
Function
Operates when the IJ printer is ready for
Ready
printing or in input mode.
Fault
Operates when the IJ printer is fault state.
Operates when the IJ printer is in alarm
Warning
condition.
Print. in
Operates when the IJ printer is engaged in
Progress *4)
printing.
Operates when the IJ printer completes a
Print.
printing process
Completed *4)
(outputs a pulse of up to 1 second).
Operates when the IJ printer is in online
Online output
mode
1
2
3
4
5
Electrical characteristics
Open collector (NPN)
● Sink current: 20 mA max.
● ON voltage: 0.5 V or less
● Operating voltage: 30 V or less
Open collector (NPN) Open collector (PNP)
● ON voltage:
● I in: 10 mA max.
0.5 V or less
(Load resister:
● Sink current:
2.2kΩ or more)
20 mA max.
● ON voltage: +24V
● Operating voltage:
30 V or less
*4): As regards "Print. in progress" and "Print. completed", one must be selected from a screen.
4.3.1 Print target detector input
This function inputs the IJ printer print start signal.
Use a no-contact (transistor) type print target detector. An optoelectronic sensor with built-in amplifier
which uses a light beam to detect the print target is ideal. When the total current consumption of the print
target detector and the rotary encoder is 100mA or less, power can be supplied from the power supply
built into the IJ printer. When the total current consumption exceeds 100mA, provide a dedicated power
supply.
In this case, perform wiring and setting as described below.
(1) Print target detector connection method
(a) When NPN interface and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
(b) When PNP interface and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
TB1
Power
Signal
GND
Print target detector
・SW1 "3": ON
・SW1 "5": ON
・SW1 "6": OFF
SW1 setting
ON
1
2
3
4
4-9 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
5
6
7
8
TB1
1
DC24V
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
ON
OFF
Power
Signal
GND
Print target detector
ON
2
3
DC24V
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
・SW1 "3": OFF
・SW1 "5": ON
・SW1 "6": ON
SW1 setting
1
1
4
5
6
7
8
ON
OFF
(c) When NPN interface and dedicated power
supply are used
(d) When PNP interface and dedicated power
supply are used
TB1
TB1
DC24V
Power
1
Signal
GND
GND
24VDC dedicated
power supply
DC24V
2
Signal
3
NC
4
NC
Power
DC24V
Signal
GND
GND
24VDC dedicated
power supply
3
4
5
6
7
2
Signal
3
GND
4
NC
ON
・SW1 "3": OFF
・SW1 "5": OFF
・SW1 "6": ON
SW1 setting
ON
ON
2
NC
Print target detector
Print target detector
・SW1 "3": ON
・SW1 "5": OFF
SW1 setting
・SW1 "6": OFF
ON
1
1
8
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(2) Print target detector specifications
(a) When NPN interface is used
Internal circuit diagram
1
DC24V
Signal
IL
SW1-5
2
DC24V
Tr
3
GND
IJ printer
Print target detector
When the IJ printer input circuit is a current drive load for the print target detector output circuit and
output transistor Tr of the print target detector is ON, it becomes the print start signal input.
Use an output transistor Tr which satisfies the following specifications (NPN/PNP):
Withstand voltage
: 24VDC or greater
.
. 10mA)
Maximum drive current : 12mA or greater (IL=
Residual voltage
: 2V or less
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
The IJ printer built-in power supply specifications are:
Power supply voltage
: 24V
Maximum supply current
: 100mA *Note 1
*Note 1: Total power supply to print target detector and rotary encoder is max. 100mA
(b) When PNP interface is used
Internal circuit diagram
1
Power
Tr
Signal
GND
IL
DC24V
2
3
SW1-6
Print target detector
IJ printer
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-10
(3) Print target detector signal noise filter
(a) IJ printer built-in noise filter setting.
This function uses to filter the normal noise generated at the print target detector signal and noise
generated by water drops, etc. with CR.
The target sensor filter function (See “Instruction manual 4.14 Set the print specifications”) is effective
against sensor chattering.
Internal circuit diagram
1kΩ
SW1-8
2.2μF
Time constantt=2.2ms
SW1 setting・SW1 "8" ON : Filter ON
OFF: Filter OFF
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(b) Addition of external noise filter
In case that the built-in noise filter cannot eliminate the noise, add the following additional CR filter outside
of IJ Printer.
R1(Addition)
Power
1
SW1-5
Signal
2
GND
3
DC24V
Tr
Print target detector
C1(Addition)
IJ printer
If R1=1kohm (0.5W) and C1=1micro farad /25V, the CR time constant=1ms. If R1=1kohm (0.5W) and
C1=1micro farad /25V, the CR time constant=1ms. The filter could eliminate a several hundred micro-seconds
of noise. If you need to eliminate bigger noise, add an additional capacitor in parallel with C1.
Notes for addition of CR filter:
- R1 has to be less than 1kohm.
- C1 should be temperature compensating ceramic capacitor. If it is difficult to find such type of
capccitor, select high-precision and good temperature characteristics type of high dielectric
ceramic capacitor as much as possible.
- R1 and C1 should be placed near IJ Printer as much as possible.
4-11 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
(4) Relationship between print object detection signal and printing operation
3 ms min.
Print object
detection signal
3 ms min.
OFF ON
Printing operation
Printing
*: The printing preparation time minimum
value varies with the print dot matrix, ink
drop use, etc., however, the right table can
be used as a reference.
Printing
*Printing preparation
time
(Print start delay
adjustment = 0)
(Printing interval)
Nozzle size
Reference of printing preparation
time minimum value
65µm
9 ms
The accurate printing preparation time can be calculated by following formula.
Necessary printing preparation time (Note 1) = [(One scan time) × (N + 1) ] (ms)
(One scan time) =
(Number of vertical dots + Character width) × Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
N : (One scan time×N) >
= Remaining number that is set to "a"
(a: Refer to the right table.)
(ms)
Nozzle size
a
65µm
5.5
Excitation frequency: 68.9 (Model RX2, with 65µm nozzle and JP-K69 ink)
(Note 1) Time for repeated printing of fixed characters. When using the communications function or
2-dimensional bar code function, it will be longer than the time calculated from this formula.
When the speed is followed up, the number of encoder pulses shown below will serve as reference for the
minimal value of print space:
Minimal time of 1 pulse =
(Number of vertical dots + Character width) × Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
+
a
Number of necessary
encoder pulses = Minimal time of 1 pulse
(ms)
Frequency division setting value (pulse)
(5) Tracking function
● This function achieves printing even when two or more print objects are positioned between the print
object detector and print head.
● Up to four print objects can be positioned between the print object detector and print head.
● This function cannot be exercised simultaneously with the repeat-printing function.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-12
4.3.2 Product speed matching function using a rotary encoder
The product speed matching function is used when the speed of the print target or the conveyer carrying the
print target changes while the IJ printer is printing. If this function is not used, when the speed changes, the
width of the printed characters may change and the characters may be difficult to read.
When the product speed matching function is used, it is necessary to input an external electric pulse having a
period proportional to the speed to the IJ printer. Ordinarily a rotary encoder is used for this purpose. The IJ
printer can print each vertical line of the printed message in synchronization with the pulses from the rotary
encoder.
4.3.2-1 Rotary encoder specifications wiring and switch setting
(1) The specifications of the connectable rotary encoders are:
Output waveform
: Square wave (duty: 30to 70%)
Output withstand voltage : 24VDC or greater
Load current
: 20mA or greater
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
Power supply voltage
: 24VDC
Current consumption
: 100mA or less *Note 1
(When the IJ printer built-in power supply is used, the total current
consumption with the detectors is 100mA or less.)
Input signal frequency
: 200kHz or less
Number of pulses
: Decided by production line conditions
*Note 1) The maximum power supply capacity of the IJ printer built-in power supply (24VDC) is
100mA. When the current consumption of the detector and encoder exceeds 100mA and the
power supply voltage is outside 24V, use a dedicated power supply and perform the wiring
work described in (3) below.
(2) Encoder wiring and setting of SW1 on PC board EZJ127 when IJ printer built-in power supply is used
(a) When open collector output and IJ printer built-in (b) When totem pole output and IJ printer built-in
power supply are used
power supply are used
TB1
24V
24V
Signal
6
GND
24V
GND
8
Signal
9
GND
SW1 setting
ON
3
4
7
8
GND
9
Rotary encoder
ON
2
6
Signal
GND
Rotary encoder
1
24V
Signal
7
Signal
TB1
24V
5
4-13 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
6
7
8
OFF
SW1 setting
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
(3) Encoder wiring and setting of SW1 on EZJ127 PC board when used with a dedicated power supply
● Wiring used for a dedicated power supply differs according to output interface of the encoder, but can be the same
depending on power supply voltage.
(c) When open collector output and dedicated power (d) When totem pole output and dedicated power
supply are used
supply are used
(+12V, +24V)
DC dedicated power supply
+V
+V
GND GND
+V
Signal
(+12V, +24V)
DC dedicated power supply
TB1
6
GND
8
6
+V
7
+V
Signal
GND
Rotary encoder
7
GND
GND
9
TB1
Signal
8
Signal
9
GND
Rotary encoder
● Switch setting for a dedicated power supply differs according to power supply voltage, but can be the same
depending on output interface of the encoder.
SW1 setting (for 24V dedicated power supply)
ON
ON
SW1 setting (for 12V dedicated power supply)
ON
ON
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
OFF
*For open collector output and totem pole output
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
OFF
*For open collector output and totem pole output
4.3.2-2 Setting to IJ printer
(1) Make the settings related to “Product speed matching” and “Pulse rate div. factor” at the “Print specifications”
screen. (See “Instruction manual 4.14 Set the print specifications”.)
●Set “Product speed matching” to “1: Enable”.
●Set “Pulse rate div. factor” as required. This function lowers (makes the period longer) the frequency of the
input pulses inside the IJ printer. The divided pulses become the pulses used in printing.
<Description of pulse division function>
(When division factor: 001) (When division factor: 002)
Pulses from encoder
●The rotary encoder signal pulse frequency, the print scan frequency and the division factor have the
relationship shown in (Eq. 1).
Encoder pulse frequency [kHz] =
Print scan count [kHz]
Division factor (l/n)
----(Eq. 1)
●Set “Speed compensation” at the “Print specifications” screen to “Enable”, as required.
<What is “Speed compensation”?>
This function reduces changes in the print start delay when the conveyer speed changes.
CAUTION
This function cannot be used when the product speed matching function is not used.
In addition, this function cannot be used when “Repeat print” mode is set at the “Print specifications”
screen.
When “Speed compensation” is enabled, print start is delayed for 30 scans.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-14
4.3.2-3 Method of calculating the conditions which allow product speed
matching
Calculate to find whether the Ink drop use and division factor are the conditions which allow product speed
matching, based on the following.
Print quality improves as the calculation shown below is performed and the Ink drop use becomes smaller.
In addition, when changing Ink drop use, check the print quality.
(1) Set the Character width on the "Print specifications" as below depending on the Ink drop use.
Large
Small
Ink drop use
Character width set value
1/1
002
1/2
001
1/3 to 1/16
000
(2) The maximum print scan frequency is found from the following equation by means of the printed character
width and highest conveyer speed. Substitute the value according to the nozzle diameter of the type used at d.
Max. number of print scans [kHz] =
Number of horizontal dots -1
1
Highest conveyer speed [m/min]× 60 ×
Print length [mm]-d[mm]
Nozzle diameter
d
65μm
0.33
------(Eq. 2)
(3) Next, use (Eq. 3) to check if the maximum print scan frequency found from (Eq. 2) can be matched at IJ
printer set print speed.
Excitation frequency (f)
[kHz] (Eq. 3)
(Number of vertical dots + character width set value +1) × (Denominator of ink drop use (*1))
> Max. number of print scans [kHz]
● When the result of (Eq. 3) is smaller than the maximum print scan frequency (Eq. 2), product speed
matching is not performed normally and the character width becomes large.
(*1) The value is 3 when the ink drop use
is 1/3.
Normal
Character width large
●In addition, when “Product speed matching error” warning is set, a warning is generated.
In this case, (1) lower the conveyer speed, (2) widen the print character width, or (3) set Ink drop use
larger, so that the maximum print scan frequency becomes smaller than the calculated value of (Eq. 3).
(Makes the IJ printer set print speed faster than the highest conveyer speed.)
(4) The excitation frequency (f) in (Eq. 3) depends on the type of ink used. The excitation frequency by
typical nozzle diameter and ink is shown below. For other inks, refer to the handling guidance of each ink.
Nozzle diameter
Type of ink
Excitation frequency (f)
65μm
JP-K67
68.9kHz
65μm
JP-K33
74.0kHz
65μm
JP-K69
68.9kHz
4-15 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
(5) When a rotary encoder is used, the print character width cannot be changed by changing the IJ printer character
width set value.
When the print character width must be changed, a device (timing belt, pulley, etc.) which varies the conveyer
speed and rotary encoder speed synch signal pulse frequency ratio must be installed.
(6) Restriction of the speed synchronization signal pulse frequency from the rotary encoder
t1 5μs min.(f=200 kHz max)
t3 2 μs min.
Encoder signal
OFF
t2
ON
ON
See that the duty is between 30% and 70%. Duty =
t2
t1
×100%
Arrange for encoder signal cycle time (t1) to be at least 5 μs.
Flat period of encoder signal (t3) : 2 μs min.
(7) Rotary encoder selection method and calculation method
The print character width when the product speed matching function is used is determined by the amount of
movement of the product per encoder pulse.
Several examples are introduced below.
Example 1: Calculate the resolution of the rotary encoder when the rotary encoder is connected directly to the
conveyer shaft.
Conveyor
Encoder
Diameter
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction 7)
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(Inter-character dots 5 + inter-characters space 1)
●Diameter of conveyer pulley : 60mm
1 Distance the conveyer moves per 1 revolution of the rotary encoder
60mm×3.14=188.4mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while the conveyer is moving 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Required resolution of the rotary encoder (number of output pulses per 1 revolution of
the rotary encoder)
.
188.4mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=628PPR =
(. 2500PPR, Division factor=4)
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-16
Example 2: Calculate the diameter ratio (RT) of the pulley when the rotary encoder is connected to the
conveyer through a pair of pulleys.
Conveyer
Pulley B
Pulley A
Diameter
Encoder
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction 7)
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(inter-character dots 5 + inter-character space 1)
●Diameter of conveyer pulley : 60mm
●Resolution of rotary encoder : 1,000PPR
1 Amount of movement of conveyer per 1 revolution of rotary encoder
60mm × 3.14=188.4mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while conveyer moves 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Necessary number of output pulses (resolution) from rotary encoder
188.4mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=628PPR
4 Diameter ratio (RT) of pulley
RT=Diameter of pulley B/diameter of pulley A=1,000PPR/628PPR=Approx. 1.6/1
Example 3: Calculate the necessary rotary encoder resolution when a pulley is installed to the shaft of the
rotary encoder and this pulley is connected to the conveyer.
Diameter
Pulley
Conveyer
Encoder
<Calculation conditions>
●Dot font
7)
●Inter-character space
●Inter-character interval
: 5×7 dots (horizontal direction 5, vertical direction
: 1 dot (1 scan)
: 1.8mm [horizontal direction 6 dots (6 scans)]
(Inter-character dots 5 + inter-character space 1)
1 Amount of movement of conveyer per 1 revolution of rotary encoder
95.5mm × 3.14=300mm/rev
2 Number of scans which must be executed while the conveyer is moving 1mm
6 scans/1.8mm=3.33 scans/mm
3 Necessary number of output pulses (resolution) from rotary encoder
300mm/rev × 3.33 scans/mm=1,000PPR
4-17 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.3 Input function
The IJ printer can be controlled by inputting print stop, remote operation (“Startup”, “Shutdown”, “Reset”,
“Deflection voltage control”) and reciprocative print switching to pins 4, 5, and 14 to 18 of TB1 by switch or
contact signal from the outside.
Internal circuit diagram
(a) NPN interface input (no voltage input)
24V
4
Print stop
14
Deflection voltage
control
15
Reciprocative print
16
NPN interface input
specifications
4.7kΩ
Startup
*Other signals are
also the same.
17
Reset
18
Shutdown
5
GND
IJ printer
●Each input is activated when contact ON.
●No-contact signal (transistor)
Withstand voltage
: 30VDC or greater
Maximum drive current
: 6mA or greater
Residual voltage
: 2V or less
Leakage current
: 0.1mA or less
Drive method
: Open collector
●Contact signal
Use a relay whose contacts chattering at contacts ON/OFF is 2.0ms or less.
(b) PNP interface input (voltage input)
●Impressed voltage 24 to 30V
24V
4
Print stop
14
Deflection voltage control
15
Reciprocative print
16
Startup
17
Reset
18
Shutdown
*Other signals are
also the same.
4.7kΩ
PNP interface input
specifications
5
GND
IJ printer
●Each input is activated when contact ON.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-18
●No-contact (transistor)
Withstand voltage
Maximum drive current
Residual voltage
Leakage current
Drive method
●Contact signal
: 30VDC or greater
: 6mA or greater
: 2V or less
: 0.1mA or less
: Open collector
Use a relay whose contacts chattering at contacts ON/OFF is 2.0ms or less.
4.3.3-1 Print stop signal input
[Function] This function prevents printing from the outside. (Note that the Ready to print output signal does not
change even if this signal is input from the outside.)
Input ON - In the IJ printer Ready to print state, the printer does not print even if the product target
detector is turned ON. However, the product being printed cannot be aborted.
Input OFF - In the IJ printer Ready to print state, the printer prints when the product target detector is
turned ON.
Print stop signal
OFF
ON
0ms or
greater
50ms or greater
Print target detector
Printing-in-progress signal
20ms or greater
50ms or greater
50ms or greater
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
[No printing]
Printing
Printing operation
Printing
●Regarding the signal levels, the ON state indicates low level and the OFF state indicates high level.
●The tracking function cannot be used.
In the tracking mode, the timing which stops printing by print stop signal cannot be specified.
●When Repeat print is set, the IJ printer is controlled by a print start signal generated internally.
4.3.3-2 Reciprocative print signal input
[Function] This function switches the order of the characters to be printed.
Input OFF : Forward direction
(Example)
Input ON : Reverse direction
When OFF
When ON
123
Reciprocative print signal
Product target detection signal
OFF
123
(The arrow indicates
the sequence of printing. )
ON
OFF
ON
Min. 100ms
ON
Min. 100ms
*When the user environment setup item "Change Character Orientation" was set to "Reverse direction
printing", provide a minimum interval of 100ms up to input of the print target detector signal after
changeover (ON→OFF, OFF→ON) of the reciprocative printing signal.
When the Change Character Orientation was set to "normal or inverted" or "Character orientation 0 or
3", provide a minimum interval of 400ms up to input of the print target detector signal after signal
changeover.
4-19 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.3-3 Remote startup signal input
[Function] This function inputs the same operations as the IJ printer operation state operation keys (“Startup”,
“Shutdown”, “Reset”, “Deflection voltage control”(standby state and Ready to print state
switching)) by external switch or contact signal.
(a) Judgment conditions
(a-1) Remote signals in general
1 Remote signal ON time t1 shall be 100ms or greater.
t1
Remote signal
2 Take measures so that multiple remote signals are not turned ON simultaneously.
If multiple signals are turned ON simultaneously, the signals will not be accepted.
3 Signals cannot be received in the following cases:
i When a confirmation window is open
ii When the Circulation control screen is opened by maintenance function
iii When the Touch screen coordinate correction screen is opened by auxiliary function
(a-2)“Deflection voltage control”
1 When “Deflection voltage control” is input continuously, a certain OFF period is necessary.
When t2 is 10ms or less, OFF is not detected and the signal is not received.
t2
Deflection voltage control
2 Time until state changes after “Deflection voltage control” is input
t3: Within 3 seconds (Standby→Ready)
t3
Deflection voltage control
Ready signal
t4: Within 100ms (Ready→Standby)
t4
Deflection voltage control
Ready signal
3 When “Deflection voltage control” is turned ON, state confirmation is necessary.
If “Deflection voltage control” is turned on by mistake during printing, printing is aborted even in
the process of printing and the IJ printer is switched from the Ready state to the Standby state.
To prevent erroneous printing, input this signal when the printer is in a not printing state.
4 When the Product speed matching function is used, and when the print description is changed when
the line is stopped during printing, etc., the IJ printer will enter the Standby state by this signal and
the print description can be changed.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-20
(a-3) “Reset signal”
1 Input this signal when the fault signal is ON.
In addition, after signal input, check if “Fault” is cleared.
2 Turn on the “Reset signal” 30 seconds or longer after the IJ printer power is turned on.
3 The time until the fault is cleared after the “Reset signal” is input
t5: within 100ms
t5
Reset signal
Fault signal
(a-4)“Startup signal”
1 The “Startup signal” is a signal that specifies an automatic procedure up to ink ejection.
Handle it with care.
2 When the “Startup signal” is turned ON during ink stop processing, it is ignored.
3 Turn on the “Startup signal” 30 seconds or longer after the IJ printer power is turned on.
In addition, input this signal after checking if the “Fault” is cleared.
Moreover, it takes about 2 minutes for the IJ printer to enter the Ready to print state after the
“Startup signal” is turned ON.
(a-5) “Shutdown signal”
1 Turn off the power after confirming that the IJ printer has entered the Stop state after the “Shutdown
signal” is turned ON
It takes about 3 minutes for the IJ printer to enter the Stop state after the “Shutdown signal” is turned
ON.
2 The time until the state changes after the “Shutdown signal” is input
t6: within 100ms
t6
Shutdown signal
Ready signal
(Notes)
(1) For key input, input must be confirmed, but when an external signal is input, processing is
performed in accordance with the signal instructions. Especially, since “Startup”(startup
signal) specifies ejection of the ink, handle it with care.
(2) When a confirmation window is opened, input of all remote operation signals is disabled.
Re-input the signals after the confirmation window is closed.
When the line monitor screen is displayed, input of all the remote operation signals is
disabled.
(3) When the Touch screen coordinate correction or Circulation control screen is displayed,
input of all the remote operation signals is disabled. Re-input the signals after a different
screen was displayed.
(4) The remote operation signals are enabled even when a rotary encoder is used and the
conveyer is stopped during printing.
(5) When the Shutdown signal is input while the Fault window is open, the ink is stopped with
the window remaining displayed.
4-21 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.4 Output function
The state of the IJ printer is monitored by connecting the print output (“Print-in-progress” or “Print.complete”),
online output, Ready, Fault, and Warning signals to pins 10 to 23 of TB1. (No-contact (transistor) output)
Internal circuit diagram
(a) NPN interface output (no-voltage output)
Vd
19
IL
20
23
10
Print output
Online output
GND
VCE
Ready
11
GND
12
Fault
13
Warning
*Other signals are also the same.
IJ printer
●The output transistor is open collector, and the logic is transistor ON at operation ON.
●The voltage and current used by the external equipment must satisfy the following specifications:
IL <
=20mA (VCE : TYP0.6V, MAX2V)
Vd <
= DC30V
●Wiring precautions
TB1
20
Online output
23
GND
Load
*Other signals are also the same.
●When the load is a relay, solenoid, or other inductive load, connect a diode to prevent generation of a
counter electromotive force in parallel with the load.
●The load circuit is DC dedicated. It cannot be used with an AC load.
(b) PNP interface output (voltage output)
19
R
IL
20
23
24V
Print output
Online output
VCE
GND
IJ printer
●The output transistor is open collector and the logic is transistor ON (voltage output) at operation ON.
●When used with external equipment, the following shall be satisfied:
IL <
=10mA(VCE : TYP0.6V, MAX2V), Guide line of R : R => 2.2kΩ
Withstand voltage 50VDC or greater (2 times or more of the voltage used)
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-22
4.3.4-1 Print output signal (NPN/PNP interface output : TB1-19)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside at IJ Printer Print.complete or Print-in-progress.
(a) Print-in-progress and Print.complete switching
Switching of the Print-in-progress and Print.complete signals is set at the User environment setup screen.
(See Instruction manual “6.1 Set the user environment”.)
(b) Signal timing
1s or greater
Printing operation
Under 1s
Print-in-progress
Print-in-progress signal
ON
OFF
Print.complete signal
ON
*
OFF
1s
*When the next printing operation started within 1 second, turned OFF at
the stage at which the printing operation started.
4.3.4-2 Online output signal (NPN/PNP interface output : TB1-20)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside when the IJ printer is online.
4.3.4-3 Ready output (NPN interface output only : TB1-10)
[Function] This function outputs a signal to the outside to indicate IJ printer Ready-to-print state or input mode
state. (It is used to stop the conveyer when the IJ printer cannot print to prevent the product from
flowing without being printed.)
4.3.4-4 Fault signal output (NPN interface output only : TB1-12)
[Function] This function outputs an “IJ printer in fault mode” signal to the outside.
4.3.4-5 Warning signal output (NPN interface output only : TB1-13)
[Function] This function outputs an “IJ printer in warning mode” signal to the outside.
4-23 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
4.3.4-6 External communication (RS-232C)
External equipment is connected to the IJ printer by serial communication of RS-232C.
Pin No.
Name
Input/Output
Remarks
1
(NC)
-
2
RD
Input
3
SD
Output
4
DTR
-
5
SG
-
6
DSR
-
Connect with DTR by IJ printer side.
7
RTS
-
Connect with CTS by IJ printer side.
8
CTS
-
Connects with RTS by IJ printer side.
9
(NC)
-
Connect with DSR by IJ printer side.
Attaching screw : inch screw
Connector on EZJ127 board :9-pin D sub-connector(plug)
IJ printer
SD
Transmission
External unit
Output
RD
#3
RD
Reception
DTR
DSR
RTS
CTS
SD
Input
#2
#4
#6
#7
#8
#5
SG
SG
FG
Cable length : maximum 5 m
Turn OFF SW1-bit7 on EZJ 127 board.
SW1
ON
ON
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
CAUTION
●Do not bundle it together with heavy-current signals inside and outside the equipment
so that it will not be influenced by noise from a heavy-current signals (a connection
signal to the power supply, etc).
●Use a cable which is as short as possible.
●Input/output (I/O) specifications 4-24
4.3.5 Product speed matching function without a rotary encoder
(RX2-S only)
4.3.5-1 Auto product speed matching function
Auto product speed matching function is used for detecting the change of speed of the conveyer carrying
print target using the print target detector connected to the IJ printer, and prints each vertical line of the print
according to the change of speed in the same way as the Speed matching function using a rotary encoder.
Ensure to confirm the print start position and check for the slip of the print target by thoroughly testing before
using this function. If the print start position or the character width of print vary widely as a result of the test,
use the Speed matching function using a rotary encoder.
Cases that the speed can not be matched
No.
Conditions of use
1
In case the print target slips on the conveyer between after the print target passes the print target
detector and before IJ printer complete printing.
2
In case the carrying speed changes or the conveyer stops between after the print target passes the
print target detector and before IJ printer complete printing.
4.3.5-2 Print target detector
●Use a no-contact (transistor) output type print target detector with a photoelectric sensor with built-in
amplifier which detects the target using the optical beam.
●To start the print from the edge of the print target, place the print target detector so that the "Distance
between the print head and print target detector" is larger in width than print target.
4.3.5-3 IJ Printer setup
●Configure the setting for "Product speed matching", "Print target width", and "Actual print width" on "Print
Specifications" screen. (See Chapter 4.14 "Set the print specifications" in the Instruction Manual)
●Set "Auto" for "Product speed matching".
●Enter "Print Target width" and "Actual Print width" in mm.
The value for "Actual Print width" must be smaller than "Print Target width".
●"Enable" the "Speed compensation" as required.
Precaution
When "Speed compensation" is enabled, the print start position is delayed 2 scans
because calculation is performed to reduce the change of the print start position.
The position accuracy of the print start position may be worse than the product speed
matching function using a rotary encoder, because calculation is performed by sensing
the print target detector.
●When setting the "Sensor filter" on "Print specifications", set the value as small as possible so that the
Sensor filter function is completed before the target passes the print target detector.
●"Repeat count" on "Print specifications" can not be used at the same time.
●The Character width on the "Print specifications" is automatically set as below depending on the Ink drop
use.
Ink drop use
1/1
1/2
1/3 to 1/16
Character width
002
001
000
4.3.5-4 Carrying speed
●Set the minimum speed the target print is carried by conveyer to 1m/min.
●If the carrying speed the IJ printer detects is faster than the speed of when the printed without Speed
matching, print is made with the same interval as when the Speed matching function is not used.
(At the time speed exceeds the limit speed in the condition)
●If "Print Target width" or "Actual Print width" on the "Print specifications" is not entered, the print is made
with the same interval as when the Speed matching function is not used.
4-25 ●Input/output (I/O) specifications
5.COMMUNICATION
(Optional on RX2-B)
5.1 Overview
The functions described in this document are used to transmit printings and their registration numbers and
enter them into the IJ printer with an external device connected to the IJ printer via an RS-232C serial
communication line.
(1) Printings transmission
● An "item number" and "character string" are transmitted from the external device to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the "item number" and "character string" and then makes preparations for
making designated prints.
● The printings of print item for which bar codes or increased-width printings can also be transmitted by
the communication functions.
● When a number (alphabetical character) is transmitted via a communications link to a count setting
digit, the default value can be set.
(2) Print data recall transmission
● A print data "message number" is transmitted from the external device to the IJ Printer.
● The IJ printer recalls print data designated by a "message number" and makes preparations for making
prints.
(3) Print data registration transmission
● Transmits Print data's "message number" and "message name" from external unit to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer provides a "message name" and registers data currently being printed as print data of
"registration No."
(4) Print condition transmission
● The external device transmits "print specifications" and "print format" to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the "print specifications" and "print format", and prepares for making prints
under the specified conditions.
(5) Free layout transmission
● An ''item number'' and ''amount of move'' are transmitted from the external device to the IJ printer.
● The IJ printer receives the ''item number'' and ''amount of move'', and then moves the item specified to
the specified position.
(6) Calendar conditions transmission, count conditions transmission
● Transmits and sets "initial values", "range" of count conditions, and "offset", "zero suppress" of
calendar condition etc. from external unit to the IJ printer.
●Communication 5-1
(7) User pattern character transmission
● This function is used to transmit a user pattern and enter it into the IJ printer.
● A transmitted user pattern can be edited using the "Create user pattern" function, which is provided as
an auxiliary function.
(8) On-line/off-line transmission procedure
● Specifies switch of online state and offline state from external unit to the IJ printer.
(9) Remote operation transmission
● Specifies ink ejection/stop, deflection voltage control (on/off) and error reset from external unit to the
IJ printer.
(10) Time control
● Transmits and sets "current time", "calendar time", etc., from external unit to the IJ printer.
● Inquires current time from external unit to the IJ printer and the IJ printer returns "current time".
(11) Communication buffer
● The print contents received through print content transmission will not be reflected in printing
immediately, but will be temporarily held in buffer.
● The print contents are fetched from the buffer one by one for each printing, and reflected in
subsequent printing.
5-2 ●Communication
5.2 Setting Communication Environment
5.2.1 Setting Communication Environment
(1) Overview
Function
State at power-up
Communication and
signal error
Baud rate
Data format
Number of comm.
bytes
BCC code handling
Communication
mode
Print message
transfer ACK
Print spec. transfer
char. height
Description
Default
● Comm. port is OFF : Offline mode when the
power is turned on.
● Comm. port is ON : Online mode when the
power is turned on.
Comm. port is OFF
● OFF fixed
: Always offline mode and
you cannot change to the
online mode.
● Warning : An external communication error and
external signal error are considered to be
"Warning."
● Fault
: An external communication error and
Warning
external signal error are considered to be
"Fault." The printer does not print even if
the product target detector is turned ON.
● Sets the baud rate at which communication is
established with the outside.
● Eleven different settings are selectable: 150, 300,
4,800bps
600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400,
57,600, or 115,200 bps.
● Sets the data length, parity bit, and stop bits for
communication with the outside.
Data length: 8 bit
● The following settings are available.
Parity bit : none
1 Data length: 7 or 8 bits
Stop bits : 1 bit
2 Parity bit: none, odd, or even
3 Stop bits: 1 bit or 2 bits
● Sets the number of character code bytes for
communication with the outside.
1 byte
● A setting of 1 byte or 2 bytes can be selected.
● Setup can be performed so that no communication
error occurs even if BCC code attached data is
Disable
received.
● Overwrite-protected: No new data will be received
until the previously received
data is printed.
● Overwrite-enabled : New data is received even if
Overwrite- protected
the previously received data
has not been printed.
The newly received data
overwrites the old data.
● t=fixed : The time from receiving the print
description from an external device to
sending ACK becomes nearly fixed
t=async.
regardless of the transmission volume.
● t=async. : The system will be ready to print
immediately after returning ACK.
● 2 digits: Uses 2-digit data for character height
setting ([00] to [99]) transmission.
2 digits
● 3 digits: Uses 3-digit data for transmission.
●Setting Communication Environment 5-3
(2) Operating procedure
1 Press Communication environment setup from the Environment setup menu.
The "Communication environment setup" screen appears.
Comm. env. setup
State at power-up
[Stop
]
Com=0
Comm. port in ON
Warn.
Communication and signal error
Fault
M
Manual
<Transmission condition by port>
Target port
2015.07.07 12:45
Startup
Standard port
HOME
4800
Baud rate (bps)
<Data format>
Data length
7 bits
Parity bit
Disable
Stop bits
1 bits
2 bits
1 byte
2 bytes
Disable
Enable
Change the on-line
or off-line.
8 bits
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
<Standard communication>
Number of comm. bytes
BCC code handling
Communication mode
overwrite-protected overwrite-enabled
Print message transfer ACK
t=fixed
t=async.
Print spec transfer char height
2 digits
3 digits
Back
2 Press Next settings .
The second screen appears.
Comm. env. setup
Buffer function
Buffer repeat count
Empty Buffer Fault
[Stop
Disable
]
2015.07.07 12:45
Enable
0001 (1〜9999)
Disable
Com=0
Enable
Timing of Fault
Print Start
Data Number at Fault
0
(0〜9)
M
Manual
Startup
Print. Complete
HOME
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Back
Setting of communication buffer
(Refer to " 5.9 Communication buffer".)
5-4 ●Setting Communication Environment
5.2.2 Transmission Specifications
(1) Communication method
(2) Startup method
(3) Synchronization method
(4) Transmission method
(5) Baud rate
(6) Codes transmitted
(7) Data format
Item
Format
A
B
C
D
E
F (default)
G
H
I
J
: Half duplex
: Started up by host
: Asynchronous
: Bit serial transmission
: 150, 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400,
57,600, 115,200(bps)
: Alphanumerical characters, symbols, dedicated characters,
user pattern characters, and punctuation characters
: Formats A through J are selectable (see the table below).
No other formats can be chosen.
Data format table
Start bit
Data length
(bits)
(bits)
1
7
1
7
1
7
1
7
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
Parity bit
(bits)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
None
None
1 (even)
1 (odd)
1 (even)
1 (odd)
Stop bits
(bits)
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
Selecting a data length of 7 bits allows you to transmit alphanumerical characters
and symbols but inhibits you from transmitting punctuation characters and using
2-byte codes to send dedicated characters and user pattern characters.
(8) Bit configuration
Formats A and B
Start
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
Parity
Stop
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
Parity
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Stop
b0
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Stop
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Parity
Stop
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
b7
Parity
Stop
Formats C and D
Start
Formats E
Start
Stop
Formats F
Start
Formats G and H
Start
b0
Formats I and J
Start
b0
Stop
Order of code transmission: Transmission occurs beginning with the least significant bit (b0).
(9) Error control
● Vertical parity error (detection on an individual character basis)
● Overrun error
● Framing error
●Setting Communication Environment 5-5
5.3 Transmission Sequences
5.3.1 Common Transmission Sequences
(1)Basic transmission operation.
1 When ENQ and ACK are present:
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
Text
STX
ETX
ACK
ACK
2 When ENQ is omitted:
External device
Text
STX
ETX
IJ printer
ACK
(2)When DC2 (retransmission) code is used
(When no response is received though ENQ has been issued and yet the contents of print
area switched)
External device
DC2
IJ printer
STX
ENQ
ACK
Text
ETX
ACK
ACK
(3)When the IJ printer is incapable of receiving data or is off-line
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
NAK
(4)Abnormal transmission operation (when the text contains an erroneous message)
External device
ENQ
IJ printer
STX
Text
ETX
ACK
NAK
(5)When BCC code is included
External device
IJ printer
ENQ
STX
Text
ETX
BCC
ACK
ACK
(6)When the IJ printer power is OFF
No response will be returned for any code transmission from the external decice.
(7) The printings, print specifications, print format, and user pattern data can be
consecutively transmitted in the following order in a single session.
1 Print format
2 Print specifications
3 Printings
(Example)
Print format
Print format
Print format
Print
specification
Print
Print content
specification
The user pattern can be positioned anywhere within the above data chain.
''Line count / print format uniformity'', ''Format setup change'' and ''Free layout transmission'' must
be transmitted independently. If an attempt is made to send it together with the other data, a
communication error (NAK response) occurs.
The print data recall must also be transmitted independently. Even if it is sent together with the
other data, no error occurs. However, the print data recall takes precedence, rendering the other
data invalid.
(8) Up to 3000 bytes of data can be transmitted at a time, including "STX" and "ETX".
If the 3000-byte limit is exceeded, a communication error (NAK response) occurs.
5-6 ●Transmission Sequences
(9) Any data transmitted by communication (print contents, print specifications, print
format, and user pattern) is not stored except in the following cases.
[Conditions for storing the data]
1 When the ink is stopped after communication by the Shut down key or a stop signal.
2 At 01 minute of every hour.
(10) Transmit to the existing print item after creating a transmission objective print item.
5.3.2 Printings Transmission
5.3.2-1 Text
(1) When printings are to be changed
DLE
Item
number
Printings
(2) If deleting character string within print item
DLE
Item
number
(3) When multiple printings are to be designated
DLE
Item
number
Printings
DLE
Printings change
Item
number
Printings erasure
● Multiple print items can be consecutively transmitted within one session.
● Print items are to be designated by specifying the item numbers. The item numbers need not be sorted
● Print items not transmitted are not changed.
● Both calendar characters and count characters can be transmitted.
● If printings are transmitted for a print item for which Micro QR setup is completed, a communication
error occurs.
●If transmission is made to the item number(s) which does NOT exist, the new item number(s) of the
message will be added, which format type is either ''Individual'' or ''Free layout''.
5.3.2-2 Item number
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
Item number
Code
1
31H
11
3BH
21
45H
31
4FH
41
59H
51
63H
61
6DH
71
77H
81
81H
91
8BH
2
32H
12
3CH
22
46H
32
50H
42
5AH
52
64H
62
6EH
72
78H
82
82H
92
8CH
3
33H
13
3DH
23
47H
33
51H
43
5BH
53
65H
63
6FH
73
79H
83
83H
93
8DH
4
34H
14
3EH
24
48H
34
52H
44
5CH
54
66H
64
70H
74
7AH
84
84H
94
8EH
5
35H
15
3FH
25
49H
35
53H
45
5DH
55
67H
65
71H
75
7BH
85
85H
95
8FH
6
36H
16
40H
26
4AH
36
54H
46
5EH
56
68H
66
72H
76
7CH
86
86H
96
90H
7
37H
17
41H
27
4BH
37
55H
47
5FH
57
69H
67
73H
77
7DH
87
87H
97
91H
8
38H
18
42H
28
4CH
38
56H
48
60H
58
6AH
68
74H
78
7EH
88
88H
98
92H
9
39H
19
43H
29
4DH
39
57H
49
61H
59
6BH
69
75H
79
7FH
89
89H
99
93H
10
3AH
20
44H
30
4EH
40
58H
50
62H
60
6CH
70
76H
80
80H
90
8AH
100
94H
● The order of print items is indicated below.
(3-column example) Circled number: Item number
Row1
Row2
1
4
2
5
3
6
●Transmission Sequences 5-7
5.3.2-3 Printings
● An array of “character codes”.
● The coding system varies with the mode which is designated by the “Number of communication bytes”
setting entered from the communication environment setup screen.
User pattern
Calendar
characters,
Count
(00 to 47)
characters
ASCII
ASCII
2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code
2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code 2-byte code
Alphanumerical
Number of
Dedicated
communication characters and
characters
bytes
symbols
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
ASCII
ASCII
Punctuation
Katakana
(48 to 199) mark
5.3.2-4 Character codes
(1) 2-byte code (number of communication bytes: 1-byte mode)
● For 1-byte mode, 2-byte codes are sandwiched between "SI" and "SO."
● One character
High-order Low-order
byte
byte
SI
SO
● Two or more characters
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
SI
SO
(2) 2-byte code (number of communication bytes: 2-byte mode)
High-order Low-order
byte
byte
(3) Mixture of ASCII and 2-byte codes (number of communication bytes: 1-byte mode)
ASCII
ASCII
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
SI
SO
ASCII
(4) Mixture of ASCII and 2-byte codes (number of communication bytes: 2-byte mode)
ASCII
High-order Low-order High-order Low-order
byte
byte
byte
byte
ASCII
ASCII
5.3.2-5 Example of print contents transmission
(1) Example when No. of communication bytes: 1 byte mode
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
10H
DLE
32H
2
Print item 1
0FH
SI
F2H 52H
Calendar
F2H 52H
Calendar
Print item 2
(2) Example when No. of communication bytes: 2 byte mode
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
Print item 1
[Transmission results]
Print item 1
Print item 2
5-8 ●Transmission Sequences
10H
DLE
32H
2
F2H 52H
Calendar
F2H 52H
Calendar
Print item 2
ABC
DD
DD:Calendar character "day"
03H
ETX
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
5.3.3 Print Data Recall Transmission
5.3.3-1 Text
ESC2
Header 20H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s palce
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 56H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 26H
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (01 to 99)
5.3.3-2 Print data message number
● An already saved print data number is to be designated as the print data message number.
● The message number is expressed by a combination of three ASCII codes.
5.3.3-3 Example of print contents transmission
(1) Example of specifying 4-digit print data registration No.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
20H
31H
1
Header, classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
03H
ETX
Print data message number
[Transmission results]
Calls print data of print data message number 12.
●Transmission Sequences 5-9
5.3.4 Print data registration transmission
5.3.4-1 Text
● Specifies message number
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
● Specifies registration No. and message name.
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
31H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (0001 to 2000)
ESC2
Header 21H
Classification
32H
Message name (1 to 12 digits)
Message name : ASCII code (20H to 5FH, 61H to 7AH)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Specifies registration No.
.
ESC
Header 55H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 25H
10s place
Units place
Print message number (01 to 99)
● Specifies registration No. and message name.
.
ESC
Header 55H
100s place
10s place
Units place
ESC
Header 86H
Message name (1 to 12 diguts)
Print data message number (001 to 999)
ESC
Header 25H
10s place
Units place
Print data message number (01 to 99)
5-10 ●Transmission Sequences
ESC
Header 86H
Message name (1 to 12 diguts)
(Contd.)
5.3.4-2 Message name
(1) message number specified
● A message name is automatically attached when print data is registered.
● Based on the message name displayed in the upper left hand corner of the screen, the last 4 digits are
replaced with the message number and used as the new message name.
(Example) Registering for No. 123
Contents displayed in upper left hand corner of the screen
:“ABCDEFGHIJKL”
Message name after registration
:“ABCDEFG 0123”
(2) Message number and message name specified
● The specified message name attached when print data is registered.
(3) Same message name is used for other message number
● If a message name is in use for other message number, new message name will be created by using
original message name as a base and replacing its 7th and 8th digits with AA~ZZ.
(Example) Message name [ABC] is already registered on No.1. Register on No.2 using identical
message name.
Message name of No.1: [ABC
]
Message name of No.2: [ABC
AA
]
(4)Characters available for message name
● Characters used for setting the message name transmission are different from characters used in
manual input on registration screen.
Function
Manual input
Message name transmission
Alphameric character/
Symbols
Available
Available
Accent character/
Arabic character
Available
Unavailable
Numbers/symbols (ASCII code): 20H to 5FH, 61H to 7AH
5.3.4-3 Supplement
● When transmitting print data together with the print contents, send the print contents last.
5.3.4-4 Example of print data registration transmission
(1) Example of registering by specifying message name
02H 1FH 21H
STX ESC2
!
31H
1
Header, classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
32H 1FH 21H
2
ESC2
!
32H
2
Print data message unmber Header, classification
41H
A
42H
B
43H
C
03H
ETX
Message name
[Transmission results]
Massage name "ABC" is assigned to current print data and is registered under message number 12.
●Transmission Sequences 5-11
5.3.5 Print Condition Transmission
5.3.5-1 Text
(1)Line count / print format uniformity
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification 31H
● Line count and print format are made uniform for all print items.
● Line count of all rows are made uniform based on the first row.
● Space between stages, character size, space between characters, whether or not to use bar code and
double width size are made uniform based on the setting value of the first print item.
● Send the message independently. The message cannot be sent together with print format, print
specs., and print contents.
● If transmission is made to the message which format setup is ''Free layout", a communication error
will occur.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 2BH
30H
(2) Format setup change
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification33H
Format setup
Format setup (30H to 32H)
Format setup
30H:Individual
31H:Overall
32H:Free layout
● This transmission can change the format setup.
● The print data will be adjusted to match the "After-change" Format setup.
● Print condition transmission shall be made independently.
Print condition can not be transmitted with Print format or Print specification or Print description.
● If "Format setup change" of "Free layout" is transmitted to RX2-Basic machine, a communication
error will occur.
(3)Configuration of print format text
● Print item not specified
Print format text
If item No. is not specified, it is set for all items.
To transmit print format and print specs. consecutively, transmit in the order of 1 print format
and 2 print specs. If transmitted the other way round, an error will occur.
● Print item specified
ESC2
Header 70H
Item No.
Print format text
Item No. specified (1 to 100)
Only specified print item is applicable for change.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC2
Header 24H
Item No. specified (1 to 100)
5-12 ●Transmission Sequences
Item No.
Print format text
(4)Print format text
● Line count and Line spacing
ESC2
Header 22H
Classification
32H
Line count
Line spacing
Line count (1 to 5) Line spacing (0 to 2)
● Character size and inter-character space
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification Character size
31H
Character size
(30H to 3CH)
10s place
Units place
Inter-character space (0 to 28)
Character size
30H : 4×5
31H : 5×5
32H : 5×8(5×7)
33H : 9×8(9×7)
34H : 7×10
35H : 10×12
36H : 12×16
37H : 18×24
38H : 24×32
39H : 11×11
3AH: 5×3(Chimney)
3BH: 5×5(Chimney)
3CH: 7×5(Chimney)
● Increased width
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
32H
Increased
width
Increased width (1 to 9)
● Bar code type (Type change, Bar code "not used" → "used")
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
33H
Type
Bar code type (30H to 47H)
● Bar code "used"→ "not used"
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
33H
30H
30H :Bar code "not used"
● Readable code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC2
Header 23H
Classification
34H
Code
Readable code type (0: None, 1: 5×5, 2: 5×7)
● Prefix code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC2
Header 23H
Bar code type
30H : not used
31H : code 39
32H : ITF
33H : NW-7
34H : EAN-13
35H : DM8×32
36H : DM16×16
37H : DM16×36
38H : DM16×48
39H : DM18×18
3AH: DM20×20
3BH: DM22×22
3CH: DM24×24
3DH: Code 128 (Code set B)
3EH: Code 128 (Code set C)
3FH: UPC-A
40H: UPC-E
41H: EAN-8
42H: QR21×21
43H: QR25×25
44H: QR29×29
45H: GS1 DataBar (Limited)
46H: GS1 DataBar
(Omnidirectional)
47H: GS1 DataBar (Stacked)
Classification Tens position Units position
35H
Prefix code (00 to 99)
● Two or more print format items can be consecutively transmitted in a single chain.
●Transmission Sequences 5-13
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Line count and Line spacing
ESC
Header 22H
Line count
Character size
30H:5×5
31H:5×8(5×7)
32H:7×10
33H:12×16
34H:18×24
35H:24×32
Line spacing
Line count (1 to 5) Line spacing (0 to 2)
● Character size and inter-character space
ESC
Header 21H
Character size
Character size (1 to 5)
inter-character
space
Bar code type
30H : code 39
31H : ITF
32H : NW-7
33H : EAN-13
34H : DM16×16
35H : DM8×32
36H : Code 128
37H : DM16×36
38H : DM16×48
39H : DM18×18
3AH: DM20×20
3BH: DM22×22
3CH: DM24×24
inter-character space (0 to 8)
● Bar code type
ESC
Header 2AH
Type
Bar code type (30H to 3CH )
● Bar code "used"→ "not used"
ESC
Header 29H
30H
Used or not used (0:not used, 1:used)
● Bar code "not used"→ "used"
ESC
Header 29H
31H
ESC
Header 2AH
Type
Used or not used (0:not used, 1:used)
● ID code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC
Header 7DH
Code
Code type (0:none, 1:5×5, 2:5×7)
● Prefix code (Bar code EAN-13)
ESC
Header 2CH
10s place
Units place
Prefix code (00 to 99)
● Code set (Code128)
ESC
Header 3FH
Code set
(0:Code set B, 1:Code set C)
● Increased width
ESC
Header 28H
Increased width
Increased width (1 to 9)
(5)Print specifications
● Character height
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
31H
10s place
Units place
Character height (00 to 99)
● Ink drop use percentage
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
32H
10s place
Units place
Ink drop use percentage (01 to 16)
● High-speed printing
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
33H
Mode
Mode (0:HM, 1:NM, 2:QM)
5-14 ●Transmission Sequences
● Character width
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
34H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character width (0000 to 3999)
● Character orientation
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
35H
Character
orientation
Character orientation (0 to 3)
● Print start delay
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
36H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (0000 to 3999)
● Print start delay (reverse)
ESC2
Header 25H Classification 1000s place
37H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (reverse) (0000 to 3999)
● Product speed matching
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
38H
Character
orientation
Product speed matching (0:Time-based, 1:Encoder based, 2:Auto-encoder based)
● Pulse rate division Factor
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
39H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Pulse rate division Factor (001 to 999)
● Repeat count
ESC2
Header 25H Classification 1000s place
3DH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat count (0000 to 9999)
● Repeat intervals
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
10000s place 1000s place
3EH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat intervals (00000 to 99999)
● Target sensor timer
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
3FH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Target sensor timer (000 to 999)
●Transmission Sequences 5-15
● Target sensor filter
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
40H
Division
Division (1:time setup, 2:until end of print)
● Target sensor filter setting value
ESC2
Header 25H
Classification
1000s place
41H
10s place
Units place
Value (0000 to 9999)
● Ink drop charge rule
ESC2
100s place
Header 25H
Classification
Charge rule
42H
Charge rule (31H:Standard, 32H:Mixed single scan and interlaced 33H:Dot mixed)
● Two or more print specification items can be consecutively transmitted in a single chain.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
●Character height
ESC
Header 30H
10s place
Units place
Character height (00 to 99)
● Character width
ESC
Header 31H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character width (000 to 199)
● Character orientation
ESC
Header 32H
Units place
Character orientation (0 to 3)
●Repeat intervals
ESC
Header 34H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat intervals (0000 to 9999)
●Repeat count
ESC
Header 35H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Repeat count (0000 to 9999)
● Print start delay
ESC
Header 33H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (0000 to 9999)
● Print start delay (reverse)
ESC
Header 36H
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Print start delay (reverse) (0000 to 9999)
●Target sensor timer
ESC
Header 37H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Target sensor timer (000 to 999)
●Target sensor filter
ESC
Header 38H
1000s place
ESC
Header 39H
Division
100s place
10s place
Target sensor filter (0000 to 9999)
Division (1:time setup, 2:until end of print)
●High-speed printing
ESC
Header 3AH
Mode
Mode (0:HM, 1:NM, 2:QM)
●Product speed matching
ESC
Header 3BH
Character
orientation
Product speed matching (0:Time-based, 1:Encoder based)
●Pulse rate division Factor
ESC
Header 3CH
100s place
10s place
Units place
Pulse rate division Factor (001 to 999)
●Ink drop use percentage
ESC
Header 3DH
10s place
Units place
Ink drop use percentage (01 to16)
5-16 ●Transmission Sequences
Units place
5.3.5-2 Text setup rules
(1) Line count
● When you change the line count for a print item in a certain column, you must also set the line
count for the other print items that belong to the same column.
(Example)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting items 7 and 8 to one line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Transmit the line count consecutively to items 7 and 8. If you transmit the line count to only one
of them, a communication error occurs.
● When you change the line count for a print item, you must also set the line count for the other print
items that belong to the same column as the former one.
(Example)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
Setting items 7 and 8 to two lines
Transmit the line count consecutively to items 7 and 8. If you transmit the line count to only one
of them, a communication error occurs.
(2) Line spacing
● When you transmit one-line setup data for a certain print item, you have to transmit a line spacing
setting of "0" as well as for the same chain as the one-line setup data.
If you do not transmit an line spacing setting of "0", a communication error occurs.
● Ensure that the same line spacing setting is selected for print items belonging to the same column.
In other words, when you transmit a new line spacing setting for a print item in a certain column,
you must consecutively transmit the same setting to the other print items in the same column.
(3) Character size and inter-character space
● The available inter-character space varies with the character size.
See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters" 4 of the Instructions
Manual.
● The total number of vertical dots cannot exceed the limit.
Machine type
RX2-BD, RX2-SD(3-line)
Option:RX2-SD(4-line)
Option:RX2-SD(5-line)
Maximum number of vertical dots
30 dots
32 dots
32 dots
● Some characters cannot be entered depending on the character size. If a print
item contains an unavailable character after a character size change, its contents
are changed to a space.
See "4.7.4 Set dot matrix, inter-character space, and other parameters" 3 of the Instructions
Manual.
● If an inter-character space other than "0" is transmitted for a print item for which bar code setup is
completed, a communication error occurs.
●Transmission Sequences 5-17
(4) Bar code use and bar code type
● Two or more bar code types cannot coexist.
● When bar code set up is completed for a print item, its inter-character space can not be changed.
(The inter-character space need not be transmitted in this case.)
● When the bar code type is ITF or code128(code set C), you have to observe the following input rules.
If you violate the rules, the contents of an illegal print item will be deleted.
ITF or code128(code set C) input rules
No.
1
Input rule
Characters must be paired to make an
entry.
Input example
(Correct) [012345]
(Incorrect) [01234]
● Some characters cannot be entered depending on the bar code type.
If any unacceptable character is included in a print item for which bar code setup is completed, the
contents of the print item are changed to a null character. See "4.7.5 Print a bar code" of the
Instructions Manual.
● FNC1 is a control code used for Code128, 2-byte code of 81A6, indicated as ※ on print layout screen.
5.3.5-3 Caution for format type "Free layout"
● When the format setup is "Free layout" and if "Line count / print format uniformity" or "Line count
and line spacing" or "High-speed printing" or "Ink drop charge rule" is transmitted, a communication
error will occur.
5.3.5-4 Example of print conditions transmission
(1) Example where print item is not specified
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
22H
“
32H
2
Header,
classification
31H
1
30H
0
1FH
ESC2
Line count 1
line spacing 0
25H
%
36H
6
30H
0
Header,
classification
31H
1
32H
2
33H
3
03H
ETX
Write position 123
[Transmission results]
All print items are set as 1 stage, write position is changed to 0123.
(2) Example where print item is specified
02H 1FH 70H 31H 1FH 23H 31H 34H 30H 30H 1FH 70H 33H 1FH 23H 31H 34H 30H 30H 03H
STX ESC2 p
1 ESC2 #
1
4
0
0 ESC2 p
3 ESC2 #
1
4
0
0 EXT
Header, item No.
Header,
classification
Character size 7×10, Header,
inter-character space 0 item No.
[Transmission results]
Upper stage character size is changed.
1
2
5-18 ●Transmission Sequences
3
4
1
3
2
4
Header,
Character size 7×10,
classification inter-character space 0
5.3.6 Free Layout Transmission
5.3.6-1 Overview
● When Format setup is "Free layout", the selected print item can be moved individually.
● Free layout transmission shall be made independently. Free layout transmission can NOT be transmitted
with Print format or Print specification or Print description.
● If transmission is made to the item number(s) which does not exist, a communication error will occur.
● If transmission is made when the format setup is either "Individual" or "Overall", a communication error
will occur.
● If transmission is made to RX2-Basic machine, a communication error will occur.
5.3.6-2 Text
(1) Specify Horizontal/Vertical coordinate and move
● Specify the bottom-left coordinate and the print item will be moved.
● Horizontal and Vertical coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
31H
Item
number
10000s
place
10s place
Unit place (Contd.)
Horizontal (X) coordinate
(0 to 31998)
Item number
(1 to 100)
10s place
1000s place 100s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) coordinate
(0 to 29)
● Horizontal coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
32H
Item
number
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Unit place
Horizontal (X) coordinate
(0 to 31998)
Item number
(1 to 100)
● Vertical coordinate
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
33H
Item
number
10s place
Unit place
Item number Vertical (Y) coordinate
(1 to 100)
(0 to 29)
●Transmission Sequences 5-19
(2)Specify Horizontal/Vertical directions and move
● Specify the number of dots for moving and the print item will be moved.
● Horizontal and Vertical move
ESC2
Item
number
Header 24H Classification
41H
(Contd.)
Item number
(1 to 100)
Horizontal sign/Vertical sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " + (plus)"
2DH:" - (minus)"
Horizontal
sign
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Unit place (Contd.)
Horizontal (X) direction
(-31998 to +31998)
Vertical
sign
10s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) direction
(-29 to +29)
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for both Horizontal/Vertical directions.
-- In case there will be NO horizontal move, input either "+00000" or "-00000".
-- In case there will be NO vertical move, input either "+00" or "-00".
● Horizontal move
ESC2
Item
number
Header 24H Classification
42H
(Contd.)
Item number
(1 to 100)
Horizontal sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " + (plus)"
2DH:" - (minus)"
Horizontal
sign
10000s
place
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Horizontal (X) direction
(-31998 to +31998)
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for Horizontal direction.
-- In case there will be NO horizontal move, input either "+00000" or "-00000".
● Vertical move
ESC2
Header 24H Classification
43H
Item
number
Item number
(1 to 100)
Vertical
sign
10s place
Unit place
Vertical (Y) direction
(-29 to +29)
Vertical sign
(Input either one of the two.)
2BH: " + (plus)"
2DH:" - (minus)"
-- Either plus(+) or minus(-) sign to be input for Vertical direction.
-- In case there will be NO vertical move, input either "+00" or "-00".
5-20 ●Transmission Sequences
Unit place
5.3.6-3 Example of Free layout transmission
(1) Specify Horizontal/Vertical coordinate and move
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
31H
1
35H
5
30H
0
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
30H
0
Horizontal (X)
coordinate
32H
2
35H
5
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y)
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 5: Horizontal (X) coordinate will be set to 120 and Vertical (Y) coordinate to 25.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
32H
2
31H
1
31H
1
Header, Item No.
classification
32H
2
33H
3
34H
4
35H
5
03H
ETX
Horizontal (X)
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 1: Horizontal (X) coordinate will be set to "12345".
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
33H
3
94H
100
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Header, Item No. Vertical (Y)
classification
coordinate
[Transmission result]
Print item 100: Vertical (Y) coordinate will be set to "0".
●Transmission Sequences 5-21
(2) Specify Horizontal/Vertical directions and move
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
3AH
10
2BH
+
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
30H
0
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2BH
+
32H
2
30H
0
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 10 rightward by 100 and upward by 20.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
44H
20
2DH
-
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
32H
2
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
-
30H
0
35H
5
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 20 leftward by 20 and downward by 5.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
32H
2
2BH
+
Header, Item No.
classification
31H
1
32H
2
33H
3
34H
4
35H
5
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
-
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 2 rightward by 12345.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
41H
A
62H
50
2BH
+
Header,
Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
Horizontal (X) direction
2DH
-
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
42H
B
34H
4
2DH
-
Header, Item No.
classification
30H
0
30H
0
31H
1
Horizontal (X) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 4 leftward by 100.
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
24H
$
43H
C
80H
80
2BH
+
30H
0
35H
5
03H
ETX
Header, Item No. Vertical (Y) direction
classification
[Transmission result] Move print item 80 upward by 5.
5-22 ●Transmission Sequences
30H
0
30H
0
Vertical (Y) direction
[Transmission result] Move print item 50 downward by 10.
02H
STX
31H
1
30H
0
03H
ETX
03H
ETX
5.3.7 Calendar Conditions Transmission
5.3.7-1 Text
(1) Calendar Conditions Transmission
● Offset
ESC2
Header 28H
Classification Calendar
32H
block No.
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Type
1000s place 100s place
10s place
Units
place
Offset
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
Offset setting range
Setting item
Offset setting range
Year
0000 to 9999
Month
0000 to 9999
Day
0000 to 1999
Hour
-023 to 0099
Minute
-059 to 0099
“-” (2DH) when setting negative offset to
hour, minute.
● Zero-suppression
ESC2
Header 28H
Classification Calendar
34H
block No.
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Type
Mode
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
35H : Weeks
36H : Day of week
Mode
30H : Disable
31H : Zero-suppression (space)
32H : Zero-suppression (character fill)
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● Offset
ESC2
Header 76H
Item No.
Type
1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
Offset
● Zero-suppression
ESC2
Header 77H
Item No.
Type
Disable or
Enable
Disable or Enable (0: Disable;
1: Zero-suppression (space))
Type
30H : Year
31H : Month
32H : Day
33H : Hour
34H : Minute
●Transmission Sequences 5-23
(2) Count Conditions Transmission
ESC2
Count
Header 2CH Classification block No.
Setting
value
Calendar block No.
(1 to 8)
Classification
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
38H
39H
3AH
3BH
3EH
Item name
Initial value
Range 1
Range 2
Update setting range (In progress)
Update setting range (Unit)
Increment setting range
Direction
Jump from
Jump to
Reset
Reset signal (option)
External signal count (option)
Setting value
Character code
Character code
Character code
000000 to 999998
000001 to 999999
01 to 99
0: up, 1: down
Character code
Character code
Character code
0:signal 1, 1:signal 2
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Character code of setting value
Mode
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
Alphanumeric
ASCII
ASCII
User pattern
ASCII
2-byte code
*) When count characters has been divided (e.g., [ CC
5-24 ●Transmission Sequences
CC
]), transmit four-digits characters.
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Initial value, Range, Jump from, Jump to, Reset
ESC
Header 80H
Item No.
Type
Initial value
30
Range 1
31
Range 2
32
Setting value
Code of type
ASCII
Jump from
33
Jump to
34
Reset
35
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
Character code of setting value
Mode
1-byte mode
2-byte mode
Alphanumeric
ASCII
ASCII
User pattern
ASCII
1-byte code
*) When count characters has been divided (e.g., [
CC
CC
]), transmit four-digits characters.
100000s
place
10000s place 1000s place
(2) Update setting range
ESC
Header 81H
Item No.
In progress
30
Unit
31
Type
100s place
10s place
Units place
Code of type
ASCII
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
Update setting range
Set item
In progress
Unit
Update setting range
000000 to 999998
000001 to 999999
(3) Direction, External signal count, Reset signal
ESC
Header 82H
Item No.
Type
0/1
Direction
(0: up, 1: down)
External signal count (0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Reset signa
(0:Signal1, 1:Signal2)
Code of type
Direction
30
ASCII
External signal count
31
Reset signal
32
ASCII is hexadecimal number.
(4) Increment
ESC
Header 83H
Item No.
Type
10s place
Unit place
Increment setting range
Set item
Increment
Increment setting range
01 to 99
5.3.7-2 Example of calendar conditions transmission
(1) Example of offset
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
28H
(
32H
2
32H
2
32H
Day
30H
0
Header,
Calendar
classification block No.
30H
0
31H
1
32H
2
03H
ETX
Offset 12 days
[Transmission results]
Defines offset 12 days for calendar block 2.
●Transmission Sequences 5-25
5.3.7-3 Example of count conditions transmission
(1) Example of reset
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
2CH
,
3AH
:
31H
1
30H
0
30H
0
Header,
Count
classification block No.
30H
0
30H
0
30H
0
03H
ETX
Reset value 00000
[Transmission results]
Defines reset value 00000 for count block 1.
5.3.8 User Pattern Character Transmission
5.3.8-1 Text
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "1" for communication
ESC2
Header 32H Classification
Character
code
Pattern data array
Character size
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "2" for communication environment setup purposes
ESC2
Header 32H Classification
High-order
byte
Character size
Low-order
byte
Pattern data array
Character code
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "1" for communication environment setup purposes
ESC2
Header 20H
Character
size
Character
code
Pattern data array
Character size
0 : 5x5
1 : 5x8(5x7)
2 : 7x10
3 : 12x16
4 : 18x24
5 : 24x32
● When the number of communication bytes is set to "2" for communication environment setup purposes.
ESC2
Header 20H
Character
size
High-order
byte
Low-order
byte
Character code
5-26 ●Transmission Sequences
Pattern data array
5.3.8-2 Character size
● The character size is represented by the codes shown in the following table.
5.3.8-3 Pattern data
(1) Pattern data length
● The pattern data length per character varies with the character size as indicated below.
Character size code table
Character size Character size code Pattern data length (bytes)
4×5
30H
8
31H
8
5×5
5×8(5×7)
32H
8
9×8(9×7)
33H
16
34H
16
7×10
10×12
35H
32
12×16
36H
32
37H
72
18×24
24×32
38H
128
11×11
39H
32
3AH
5
5×3(chimney)
5×5(chimney)
3BH
5
7×5(chimney)
3CH
7
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Remarks
(2) Pattern data structure
The pattern data structure and data creation rules are explained below.
a) Rules
● Each pattern data unit consists of 8 bits. For each bit, dot presence is indicated by the value 1 (dot
present) or 0 (dot not present).
● Vertically arrayed 8 dots correspond to 8 bits (1 byte).
● For character sizes of 4×5, 5×5, 7×10, 5×7, and 9×7, etc., some portions of 8-bit data are
unavailable. Set such portions to "0". (Even if you set them to "1", processing will be performed with
their settings changed to "0".)
4×5
Inter-character space data area
5×5
Inter-character space data area
5×7
Inter-character space data area
●Transmission Sequences 5-27
7×10
9 ×7
Inter-character space data area
: Unavailable area
Inter-character space data area
Note:The inter-character space is 1 dot at the maximum.
10×12
Inter-character space data area
5-28 ●Transmission Sequences
11×11
Inter-character space data area
5×3 (Chimney)
5×5 (Chimney)
7×5 (Chimney)
●Transmission Sequences 5-29
● For pattern data composition purposes, the data is arranged in successive order, beginning from the
bottom left, from bottom to top and from left to right.
b) Pattern data example
[For a character size of 5×5]
Unusable area
Inter-character space data area
4
5 6 7 8
byte
byte
byte
byte
● ●
●
●
●●●●●
●
●
byte
Third byte
Second byte
First byte
●
Removal of the first byte
27
20
●●●
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 = 07H
●
● Rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise
●
Composition order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pattern data
07H 0AH 12H 0AH 07H 00H 00H 00H
5-30 ●Transmission Sequences
[For a character size of 18×24]
●●
●●●●
●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
●●●
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
2 5 8 11 14 17 20 23 26 29 32 35 38 41 44 47 50 53 56 59 62 65 68 71
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
byte
1 4 7 10 13 16 19 22 25 28 31 34 37 40 43 46 49 52 55 58 61 64 67 70
●Transmission Sequences 5-31
5.3.8-4 Character codes
For character code designation, either ASCII codes or 2-byte codes are used.
(1) ASCII codes (when the number of communication bytes is 1)
User pattern character
ASCII
User pattern character
ASCII
User pattern character
ASCII
00
D0
16
E0
32
F0
01
D1
17
E1
33
F1
02
D2
18
E2
34
F2
03
D3
19
E3
35
F3
04
D4
20
E4
36
F4
05
D5
21
E5
37
F5
06
D6
22
E6
38
F6
07
D7
23
E7
39
F7
08
D8
24
E8
40
F8
09 10 11 12 13 14 15
D9 DA DB DC DD DE DF
25 26 27 28 29 30 31
E9 EA EB EC ED EE EF
41 42 43 44 45 46 47
F9 FA FB FC FD FE FF
ASCII codes are in hexadecimal notation.
Applicable to cases where the number of user pattern characters does not exceed 48 (user pattern characters
00 through 47).
(2) 2-byte codes (when the number of communication bytes is 2)
User pattern character 00: F140 = high-order byte F1 + low-order byte 40
See “5.4.1 Code Tables”.
5.3.8-5 Supplement
(1) If the same character code is used to transmit two or more user pattern character data in a single message,
the last-transmitted data takes effect.
(2) When two or more user pattern characters having differing character sizes or character codes are
transmitted in a single message, no limitations are imposed on the order in which they are transmitted.
5.3.8-6 Example of user registration character transmission
(1) Example where number of communication bytes of communication environment
settings is "1 byte," character size is "5 x 5" and character code is "47."
02H
STX
1FH
ESC2
32H
2
31H
5x5
FFH
47
Header,
Code 47
classification
07H
-
0AH
-
12H
-
0AH
-
00H
-
Pattern data arrangement
[Transmission results]
Defines character size 5×5, character code 47 user pattern.
5-32 ●Transmission Sequences
07H
-
00H
-
00H
-
03H
ETX
5.3.9 On-line/off-line Transmission Procedure
5.3.9-1 Text
(1) Change to online
ESC2
Header 73H
(2) Change to offline
ESC2
Header 74H
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Change to online
ESC
Header 79H
(2) Change to offline
ESC
Header 7AH
● In the following cases, Online/Offline transmission cannot be performed.
If it is attempted, NAK code will be the reply:
1 "Apply" key is displayed while inputting set value.
2 In the "Communication environment setup" screen, "Off fixed" is selected for "State at power-up"
item.
3 During input of count conditions.
4 The confirmation window is open.
5 The circulation control screen is opened by the maintenance function.
6 The touch screen setup screen is opened by the auxiliary function.
7 The communication monitor screen is opened.
5.3.9-2 Transmission example
External device
ESC2
73H
IJ printer
ACK
ENQ, STX and ETX are not required.
●Transmission Sequences 5-33
5.3.10 Remote Operation Transmission
5.3.10-1 Text
ESC2
Header 72H
Type
Type
30H:Operation start
31H:Operation stop
32H:Deflection voltage control (ON)
33H:Deflection voltage control (OFF)
34H:Fault clear
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
ESC
Header 71H
Type
5.3.10-2 Types of control
Types of control for operation
No.
Type
1
Operation start
2
Operation stop
3
4
5
Deflection
voltage control
(ON)
Deflection
voltage control
(OFF)
Fault clear
Content
Starts to jet ink, and shifts from stop status to ready
status.
(Same process as with <Startup> button)
Stops ink jet, and shifts to stop status (Same process as
with <Shutdown> button)
Turns deflection voltage on
(Same process as with <Ready> button in Manual
control menu window)
Turns deflection voltage off
(Same process as with <Standby> button in Manual
control menu window)
Closes the window for any fault that has occurred.
However, the window will remain if the cause of fault
is not resolved.
Function enabled status
Stop status
When ink is being jetted
(standby, ready status, etc.)
Standby status
Ready status
When fault has occurred
● Specify only one category of control at a time.
● Even if executing function is not possible, ACK will be answered, but no function will be executed.
5-34 ●Transmission Sequences
5.3.11 Time control
5.3.11-1 Text
(1) Date/time setup transmission
● Current time
Header
2EH
ESC2
1000s
place
Classification
31H
100s
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Hour
Day
(Contd.)
Month
Year
10s
place
Units
place
Units
place
Minutes
10s
place
Units
place
Second
● Calendar time control
Header
2EH
ESC2
Control
type
Classification
32H
Control type (31H: Same as current time; 32H: Clock stop)
● Calendar time
Header
2EH
ESC2
1000s
place
Classification
33H
100s
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Units
place
10s
place
Hour
Day
(Contd.)
Month
Year
10s
place
Units
place
Units
place
Minutes
10s
place
Units
place
Second
● Clock system
ESC2
Header
2EH
Classification
34H
Control
type
Control type (31H: 24-hour system; 32H: 12-hour system)
(2) Current time output transmission
Outputs current time of IJ printer internal calendar.
External device
IJ printer
ESC2 Header
75H
ACK
STX
Header
ESC2 7FH Yaer
Second
ETX
Year / month / day / hour / minute / second / 14 digits
●Transmission Sequences 5-35
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
(1) Date/time setup transmission
● Current date/time
ESC
Header 72H 1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Yaer
10s place
Units place
10s place
Day
Units place
Month
10s place
Units place
10s place
Minutes
Hour
Units place
(Contd.)
Units place
Second
● Calendar time control
ESC
Header 73H control type
control type (31H:Same as current time, 32H:Clock stop)
● Calendar time
ESC
Header 74H 1000s place
100s place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Units place
10s place
Yaer
10s place
Units place
10s place
Day
Units place
(Contd.)
Month
10s place
Minutes
Hour
Units place
Units place
Second
(2) Current time output transmission
● Clock system
ESC
Header 75H control type
control type (31H:24-hour system, 32H:12-hour system)
External device
ESC2 Header
7BH
IJ printer
ACK
STX
ESC
Header
7CH Yaer
Second
ETX
Year / month / day / hour / minute / second / 14 digits
5.3.11-2 Date/time setup
(1) This function allows operator to set each item on "Date/time setup screen" for Maintenance menu.
No.
Setting item
1
Current time
2
3
4
Calendar time control
Calendar time
Clock system
Setting contents
Current date time displayed across the very top of screen
(year/month/day/hour/minute/second)
Same as current time, clock stopped
Time reflected in calendar characters of print contents
24/12-hour system
(2) After receiving date and time setting transmission, the print contents calendar characters and current time
display are updated.
(3) When transmitting "calendar time", first transmit the message for "calendar time: clock stop":
Simultaneous transmission is also possible.
(4) When changing the calendar time control from "clock stop" to "same as current time", the values on
calendar time will not be saved.
5.3.11-3 Example of time control transmission
(1) Example of setting current time
02H 1FH 2EH 31H 32H 30H 31H 35H 30H 37H 30H 37H 31H 32H 34H 35H 30H 30H 03H
STX ESC2
.
1
2
0
1
2
0
7
0
7
1
2
4
5
0
0 ETX
Header, classification
Yaer
[Transmission results]
Set current time to 2015/07/07, 12:45:00.
5-36 ●Transmission Sequences
Month
Day
Hour
Minutes
Second
5.4 Code Tables
5.4.1 Code Tables
(1)Transmission control
ASCII
02H
03H
Name
STX
(start)
ETX
(end)
05H
ENQ
(enquiry)
06H
ACK
(acknowledgment)
0EH
0FH
10H
SO
(shift out)
SI
(shift in)
DLE
(start of item)
12H
DC2
(retransmission)
13H
DC3
(retransmission)
15H
NAK
(negative
acknowledgment)
1BH
ESC
(start of header)
1FH
ESC2
(start of header)
Description
Code that is transmitted immediately before text.
Code that is transmitted immediately after text.
This enquiry code is used when the external device checks whether
the IJ printer is ready for signal reception. This code must be
transmitted before data transmission to the IJ printer. When the IJ
printer is ready for reception, the "ACK" code is transmitted after
ENQ code reception. If the IJ printer is not ready for reception, the
"NAK" code is transmitted.
1 When the IJ printer is ready for reception, it transmits this code in
response to an "ENQ" code reception from the external device.
2 This code reports that text reception is normally completed.
When the 1-byte transmission mode prevails, this code is positioned
at the end of 2-byte code for transmission purposes.
When the 1-byte transmission mode prevails, this code is positioned
at the beginning of 2-byte code for transmission purposes.
This code is positioned at the beginning of printings for each print
item for transmission purposes.
This code is transmitted if the printings need to be changed before
the printing of the contents transmitted to the IJ printer while the
overwrite-protected mode prevails. After receipt of this code, the
IJ printer transmits the ACK code and becomes ready for reception.
However, if the IJ printer is off-line, the "NAK" code is transmitted.
The same as DC2.
However, when receiving DC3, the IJ printer terminates printing
forcibly.
1 The IJ printer transmits this code if it is not ready for reception
when it receives the "ENQ" code from the external device.
2 This code reports that text reception is not normally completed
(when, for instance, the received data is in transmission error or
an unregistered print data number is received)
This code is positioned at the beginning of a header for transmission purposes. The header is a code that recognizes the transmission
data type and is transmitted next to STX.
(Existing machine / message specs.)
This code is positioned at the beginning of a header for transmission purposes. The header is a code that recognizes the transmission
data type and is transmitted next to STX.
●Code tables 5-37
(2)ASCII codes
High-order
Low-order
0
0
1
DLE Space
1
3
4
0
5
6
7
P
9
A
p
↑
↑
↑
!
1
A
Q
a
q
B
R
b
r
8
2
STX DC2
“
2
3
ETX DC3
#
3
C
S
c
s
年
↑
$
4
D
T
d
t
月
↑
日
4
ENQ NAK
%
5
E
U
e
u
6
ACK
&
‘
6
F
V
f
v
7
‘
7
G
W
g
w
↑
8
(
8
H
X
h
x
↑
9
)
9
I
Y
i
y
A
*
:
J
Z
j
z
+
;
K
[
k
C
,
<
L
¥
l
D
-
=
M
]
m
↑
n
↑
ESC
E
SO
.
>
N
F
SI ESC2
/
?
O
Category
Transmission
control
_
D
E
F
00
16
32
↑
01
17
33
↑
02
18
34
03
19
35
↑
04
20
36
↑
05
21
37
06
22
38
↑
07
23
39
↑
08
24
40
09
25
41
10
26
42
↑
11
27
43
↑
12
28
44
13
29
45
↑
14
30
46
↑
15
31
47
↑
5
B
↑
nn
2
C
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
↑
B
↑
↑
↑
↑
o
Dedicated
characters
Standard characters
User pattern
character
: Unusable
: Dedicated character consisting of multiple codes
: User pattern character number
NOTICE
(3-code)) consisting of two or more
1 As regards a dedicated character (e.g.,
codes, the text must be created so that it can be contained within a single print item.
2 As regards a print item for which a bar code is set up, the text must be created in
such a manner that the employed character codes are within the range applicable to
the bar code.
(3)Dedicated characters (2-byte codes)
Dedicated
characters
年
月
←
日
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F040 F041 F042 F043 F044 F045 F046 F047 F048 F049 F04A F04B F04C F04D F04E F04F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F050 F051 F052 F053 F054 F055 F056 F057 F058 F059 F05A F05B F05C F05D F05E F05F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F060 F061 F062 F063 F064 F065 F066 F067 F068 F069 F06A F06B F06C F06D F06E F06F
Dedicated
characters
←
←
←
←
←
←
2-byte code F070 F071 F072 F073 F074 F075 F076 F077 F078
5-38 ●Code tables
←: Dedicated characters consisting of two or more codes.
“
” consists of three characters (F046, F047, and F048).
Special characters (2-byte codes)
(When special characters can be input)
Characters
Communication code F340 F341 F342 F343 F344 F345 F346 F347 F348 F349 F34A F34B F34C F34D F34E F34F
Characters
Communication code F350 F351 F352 F353 F354 F355 F356 F357 F358 F359
F35B F35C
F35E F35F
Characters
Communication code F360 F361 F362 F363 F364 F365 F366 F367 F368 F369 F36A F36B F36C F36D F36E F36F
Characters
Communication code F370 F371 F372 F373 F374 F375 F376 F377 F378 F379 F37A F37B F37C
Characters
Communication code F380 F381 F382 F383 F384 F385 F386 F387 F388 F389 F38A F38B F38C F38D F38E F38F
Characters
Communication code F390 F391 F392 F393 F394 F395 F396 F397 F398 F399 F39A F39B
Characters
Communication code F3A0 F3A1 F3A2 F3A3 F3A4 F3A5 F3A6 F3A7 F3A8 F3A9 F3AA F3AB F3AC F3AD F3AE F3AF
Characters
Communication code F3B0 F3B1 F3B2 F3B3 F3B4 F3B5 F3B6 F3B7 F3B8 F3B9 F3BA F3BB
Characters
Communication code
F29F
Characters
Communication code
F2AC
Characters
Communication code F3C0 F3C1 F3C2 F3C3 F3C4 F3C5 F3C6 F3C7 F3C8 F3C9 F3CA F3CB F3CC F3CD F3CE F3CF
Characters
Communication code F3D0 F3D1 F3D2 F3D3 F3F4 F3D5 F3D6
F3DF
Characters
Communication code F3E0 F3E1 F3E2 F3E3 F3E4 F3E5 F3E6 F3E7 F3E8 F3E9 F3EA E3EB E3EC F3ED F3EE F3EF
Characters
Communication code F3F0 F3F1 F3F2 F3F3 F3F4 F3F5 F3F6
Characters
Communication code F540 F541 F542 F543 F544 F545 F546 F547 F548 F549 F54A F54B F54C F54D F54E F54F
Characters
Communication code F550 F551 F552 F553 F554 F555 F556 F557 F558 F559 F55A F55B F55C F55D F55E F55F
Characters
Communication code F560 F561 F562 F563 F564 F565 F566
Characters
Communication code F570 F571 F572 F573 F574 F575 F576 F577 F578 F579 F57A F57B F57C F57D F57E
Characters
Communication code F580 F581 F582 F583 F584 F585 F586 F587 F588 F589 F58A F58B F58C F58D F58E F58F
Characters
Communication code F590 F591 F592 F593 F594 F595 F596 F597
●Code tables 5-39
Arabic characters (2-byte codes)
Characters
Communication code F44D F44C F44B F44A F449 F448 F447 F446 F445 F444 F443 F442 F441
F440
Characters
Communication code F45B
F45A F459 F458 F457 F456 F455 F454 F453 F452 F451 F450 F44F F44E
Characters
Communication code F465 F464 F463 F462 F461
F460 F45F
F45B F45D
F45C
Characters
Communication code F475 F474 F473 F472 F471 F470 F46F F46E F46D F46C F46B F46A F469 F468 F467 F466
Characters
Communication code F485 F484 F483 F482 F481 F480 F47F F47E F47D F47C F47B F47A F479 F478 F477 F476
Characters
Communication code F495 F494 F493 F492 F491 F490 F48F F48E F48D F48C F48B F48A F489 F488 F487 F486
Characters
Communication code F4A3 F4A2 F4A1 F4A0 F49F
F49E F49D F49C F49B F49A F499 F498 F497 F496
Characters
Communication code
F4AA F4A9
F3A8 F4A7
F4A6 F4A5
F4A4
F4B1 F4B0
F4AF F4AE
F4AD F4AC
F4AB
Communication code F4BC F4BB F4BA F4B9 F4B8
F4B7 F4B6
F4B5 F4B4
F4B3
Characters
Communication code F4B2
Characters
Characters
Communication code
5-40 ●Code tables
F4C6 F4C5 F4C4 F4C3 F4C2 F4C1 F4C0 F4BF F4BE F4BD
(4)User pattern characters (2-byte codes)
Fixed size
User pattern
character
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
2-byte code F140 F141 F142 F143 F144 F145 F146 F147 F148 F149 F14A F14B F14C F14D F14E F14F
User pattern
character
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
2-byte code F150 F151 F152 F153 F154 F155 F156 F157 F158 F159 F15A F15B F15C F15D F15E F15F
User pattern
character
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
2-byte code F160 F161 F162 F163 F164 F165 F166 F167 F168 F169 F16A F16B F16C F16D F16E F16F
User pattern
character
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
2-byte code F170 F171 F172 F173 F174 F175 F176 F177 F178 F179 F17A F17B F17C F17D F17E F17F
User pattern
character
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
2-byte code F180 F181 F182 F183 F184 F185 F186 F187 F188 F189 F18A F18B F18C F18D F18E F18F
User pattern
character
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
2-byte code F190 F191 F192 F193 F194 F195 F196 F197 F198 F199 F19A F19B F19C F19D F19E F19F
User pattern
character
96
97
98
99
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
B0
B1
2-byte code F1A0 F1A1 F1A2 F1A3 F1A4 F1A5 F1A6 F1A7 F1A8 F1A9 F1AA F1AB F1AC F1AD F1AE F1AF
User pattern
character
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
2-byte code F1B0 F1B1 F1B2 F1B3 F1B4 F1B5 F1B6 F1B7 F1B8 F1B9 F1BA F1BB F1BC F1BD F1BE F1BF
User pattern
character
C8
C9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
E0
E1
E2
E3
2-byte code F1C0 F1C1 F1C2 F1C3 F1C4 F1C5 F1C6 F1C7 F1C8 F1C9 F1CA F1CB F1CC F1CD F1CE F1CF
User pattern
character
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
F0
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
2-byte code F1D0 F1D1 F1D2 F1D3 F1D4 F1D5 F1D6 F1D7 F1D8 F1D9 F1DA F1DB F1DC F1DD F1DE F1DF
User pattern
character
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
H0
H1
H2
H3
H4
H5
2-byte code F1E0 F1E1 F1E2 F1E3 F1E4 F1E5 F1E6 F1E7 F1E8 F1E9 F1EA F1EB F1EC F1ED F1EE F1EF
User pattern
character
H6
H7
H8
H9
I0
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
I9
J0
J1
2-byte code F1F0 F1F1 F1F2 F1F3 F1F4 F1F5 F1F6 F1F7 F1F8 F1F9 F1FA F1FB F1FC F1FD F1FE F1FF
User pattern
character
J2
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
2-byte code F220 F221 F222 F223 F224 F225 F226 F227
User pattern character display scheme
00,01 … … 09
(0 to 9)
10,11 … … 19
(10 to 19)
:
90,91 … … 99
(90 to 99)
A0,A1 … … A9
(100 to 109)
:
J0,J1 … … J9
(190 to 199)
●Code tables 5-41
(5)Punctuation characters (2-byte codes)
Punctuation
character
‘
.
:
,
Space
;
!
2-byte code F240 F241 F242 F243 F244 F245 F246
(6)Katakana (when KANA and dedicated characters can be input)
1 Available character sizes
Inter-character
space (dots)
5×8
7×10
10×12
12×16
18×24
1 to 3
1
2
4
6
2 Character codes table (2-byte code)
(1)Character size 5x8, 7x10
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
834*
ァ
ア
ィ
イ
ゥ
ウ
ェ
エ
ォ
オ
カ
キ
ク
835*
ケ
コ
セ
ソ
タ
836*
チ
ッ
837*
838*
サ
メ
839*
テ
ツ
モ
ャ
ヲ
ン
ヤ
ス
ト
フ
ヒ
ム
シ
ナ
ユ
ョ
ヌ
C
ネ
ホ
ヘ
ュ
ニ
B
ヨ
ラ
リ
ル
レ
D
E
ノ
ハ
マ
ミ
ロ
F
ワ
゛
゜
ー
(2)Character size 10x12, 12x16, 18x24
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
834*
ァ
ア
ィ
イ
ゥ
ウ
ェ
エ
ォ
オ
カ
ガ
キ
ギ
ク
グ
835*
ケ
ゲ
コ
ゴ
サ
ザ
シ
ジ
ス
ズ
セ
ゼ
ソ
ゾ
タ
ダ
836*
チ
ヂ
ッ
ツ
ヅ
テ
デ
ト
ド
ナ
ニ
ヌ
ネ
ノ
ハ
バ
837*
パ
ヒ
ビ
ピ
フ
ブ
プ
ヘ
ベ
ペ
ホ
ボ
ポ
マ
ミ
838*
ム
メ
モ
ャ
ヤ
ュ
ユ
ョ
ヨ
ラ
リ
ル
レ
ロ
ヲ
ン
839*
Character code of long “ー “ is 815B.
5-42 ●Code tables
ワ
(7)Calendar character code
● Set "calendar block starting character"as the first character and set "calendar block ending charater" as
the last character.
(Example)
Calendar block
Y Y M M D D
Calendar block end character
Calendar character
Calendar block start character
Minute Second
Total number
Day of
Weeks
of days
week
Yaer
Month
Day
Hour
Calendar character
F250
F251
F252
F253
F254
F255
F256
F258
F259
Calendar block start chracter
F260
F261
F262
F263
F264
F265
F266
F268
F269
Calendar block end chracter
F270
F271
F272
F273
F274
F275
F276
F278
F279
Calendar character is 2-byte code only.
Specified number of digits for calendar characters
Calendar character
Yaer
Month
Day
Hour
Minute
Second
Total number of days
Weeks
Day of week
Specified number of digits
1 to 4 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 2 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
1 to 3 digits
Example of when performing printings transmission of calendar character
(Example 1) Example of when setting a calendar block to print item 1
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 60H
Start chracter
F2H 50H
Calendar
F2H 51H
Calendar
F2H 71H
End chracter
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Calendar block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
YYMM
: Calendar block range
YM
: Calendar character “Year, Month”
●Code tables 5-43
(Example 2) Example of when setting 2 calendar blocks to print item 1
02H 10H 31H 0FH F2H 60H F2H 50H F2H 51H F2H 51H F2H 52H F2H 72H 0EH
STX DLE
1
SI
Start
chracter
Calendar
Calendar
Calendar
Calendar
End
chracter
(Contd.)
SO
Calendar block 1
41H 42H 43H 0FH F2H 62H F2H 52H F2H 53H F2H 73H 0EH 03H
A
B
C
SI
Start
chracter
Calendar
Calendar
End
chracter
SO ETX
Calendar block 2
[Transmission results]
: Calendar block range
YYMMDD AND DDHH
Print item1
YMDH
: Calendar character “Year, Month,
Day, Hour”
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H
50H
Calendar
F2H
50H
Calendar
F2H
51H
Calendar
F2H
51H
Calendar
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Calendar block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
: Calendar block range
YYMM
YM
: Calendar character “Year, Month”
(8)Count character code
● Set "count block starting character"as the first character and set "count block ending charater" as the
last character.
(Example)
Count block
C C C C C C
Count block end character
Count character
Count block start character
Count character
F25A
Count block start character Count block end character
F26A
F27A
Count character is 2-byte code only.
5-44 ●Code tables
C : Count character
Example of when performing printings transmission of count character
(Example 1)Example of when setting a count block to print item 1
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 6AH
Start chracter
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 7AH
End chracter
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Count block
[Transmission results]
: Count block range
CCCC
Print item1
: Count character
C
(Example 2)Example of when setting 2 count blocks to print item 1
02H 10H 31H 0FH F2H 6AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 7AH 0EH
STX DLE
1
SI
Start
chracter
Count
Count
Count
Count
End
chracter
(Contd.)
SO
Count block 1
41H 42H 43H 0FH F2H 6AH F2H 5AH F2H 5AH F2H 7AH 0EH 03H
A
B
C
SI
Start
chracter
Count
End
chracter
Count
SO ETX
Count block 2
[Transmission results]
CCCCCC
Print item1
ABC C C C C
: Count block range
: Count character
C
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
02H
STX
10H
DLE
31H
1
0FH
SI
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
F2H 5AH
Count
0EH
SO
03H
ETX
Countr block
[Transmission results]
Print item1
CCCC
: Count block range
C
: Count character
●Code tables 5-45
5.4.2 Header Table
ESC2
Header
Classification
Type
Recall
Registration
Message number
Header Classification
4
0001 to 2000
31H
4
0001 to 2000
32H
1 to 12
31H
0
-
32H
2
Line count : 1 to 5
Line spacing: 0 to 2
Format setup change
33H
1
Format setup : 30H to 32H
Character size/
inter character space
31H
3
Character size : 30H to 3CH
Inter character space : 00 to 28
32H
1
1 to 9
33H
1
30H to 47H
Readable code
34H
1
0 to 2
Prefix Code
35H
2
00 to 99
Horizontal and Vertical
coordinate
31H
8
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) coordinate: 0 to 31998
Vertical (Y) coordinate : 0 to 29
Horizontal coordinate
32H
6
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) coordinate : 0 to 31998
Vertical coordinate
33H
3
Item number : 1 to 100
Vertical (Y) coordinate : 0 to 29
41H
10
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) direction :
-31998 to +31998
Vertical (Y) direction : -29 to +29
Horizontal move
42H
7
Item number : 1 to 100
Horizontal (X) direction :
-31998 to +31998
Vertical move
43H
4
Item number : 1 to 100
Vertical (Y) direction : -29 to +29
Character height
31H
2
00 to 99
Ink drop use percentage
32H
2
01 to 16
High-speed printing
33H
1
0 to 2
Character width
34H
4
0000 to 3999
Character orientation
35H
1
0 to 3
Print start delay
36H
4
0000 to 9999
37H
4
0000 to 9999
Message name
21H
Line count, print format
uniformity
Line count/Line spacing
Print format
Increased width
Bar code
Free layout
Horizontal and Vertical
move
Print start delay (reverse)
Print
Product speed matching
specifications
Pulse rate division Factor
5-46 ●Code tables
Data section
31H
Message number
20H
Data
count
22H
23H
24H
Message name: Max 12 digits
38H
1
0 to 2
39H
3
001 to 999
Repeat count
3DH
4
0000 to 9999
Repeat intervals
3EH
5
00000 to 99999
Target sensor timer
3FH
3
000 to 999
Target sensor filter
40H
1
1 to 2
Target sensor filter value
41H
4
0000 to 9999
Ink drop charge rule
42H
1
Charge rule : 31H to 33H
25H
Type
Calendar
condition
Count
condition
Date/time
setup
User pattern
character
transmission
Other
Header Classification
Data
count
Data section
32H
6
Calendar block : 1 to 8
Type : 0 to 4
Offset : Yaer 0000 to 0099
Month 0000 to 0099
Day
0000 to 1999
Hour -023 to 0099
Minute -059 to 0099
Zero suppress usage
(Year / month / day / hour
/ minute / week /
Day of week)
34H
3
Calendar block : 1 to 8
Type : 0 to 6
Mode : 0 to 2
Initial value
31H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Initial value : max 20 digits
Range 1
32H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Range 1 : max 20 digits
Range 2
33H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Range 2 : max 20 digits
Update (in progress)
34H
7
Count block : 1 to 8
Update (in progress) : 000000 to 999998
Update (unit)
35H
7
Count block : 1 to 8
Update (unit) : 000001 to 999999
Increment
36H
3
Count block : 1 to 8
Increment : 01 to 99
Direction
37H
2
Count block : 1 to 8
Direction : 0 to 1
Jump from
38H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Jump from : max 20 digits
Jump to
39H
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Jump to : max 20 digits
Reset
3AH
Variable
Count block : 1 to 8
Reset : max 20 digits
Reset signal
3BH
2
Count block : 1 to 8
Reset signal : 0 to 1
External signal count
3EH
2
Count block : 1 to 8
External count : 0 to 1
Current time
31H
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
32H
1
1 to 2
Offset
(Year / month / day / hour
/ minute)
28H
2CH
Calendar time control
2EH
Calendar time
33H
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
Clock system
34H
1
1 to 2
30H to 3CH
-
Character code + pattern data
Used together with print format message
Character size fixed
pattern
32H
Item No. specification
70H
Item No.
-
Remote operation
72H
30H to 34H
-
Online
73H
-
-
No STX/ETX
Offline
74H
-
-
No STX/EXT
Current time inquiry
75H
-
-
No STX/ETX; Inquiry
Communication buffer
Claer buffer
76H
-
-
Communication buffer
Reset printing
77H
-
-
Current time output
7FH
-
14
Yaer, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,
Second (14 digits)
●Code tables 5-47
5.5 Communication Timing
5.5.1 Signal Timing
(1)In overwrite-protected mode
On-line
Off-line
ENQ
External
device
ENQ
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
A
B
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ENQ
ENQ
STX
ETX
C
IJ printer
NAK
(No signal output)
Readiness
for reception
Ready for
reception
NAK
ACK
ACK
Not ready
for
reception
Print start signal
Printing
operation
A
(a)
(b)
B
(c)
C
C
(d)
(a) When the IJ printer is off-line
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to an ENQ code reception from the outside.
(b) When the IJ printer is on-line
1 When transmitting printing only
● Transmission data is received from the external device. When the received data is not in error, the
ACK code is transmitted and the "not ready for reception" state prevails.
● To switch from the "not ready for reception" state to the "ready for reception" state, perform one of
the following procedures.
1) Perform a printing operation once.
2) Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
3) Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line
mode.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the NAK code is transmitted after receipt
of the ETX code.
Since the "ready for reception" state is maintained in this instance, retransmit the data beginning.
2 When transmitting print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall
● When the data received from the external device is not in error, the ACK code is transmitted.
In this instance, the "ready for reception" state is maintained.
3 When transmitting printing, print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall
● When transmitting printing, print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall, ensure that
the print conditions, user pattern characters, and print data recall are transmitted prior to the printing.
If the printing is transmitted earlier than the other data, the "not ready for reception" state prevails.
Therefore, the subsequent transmission of the print conditions, user registration characters, and print
data recall causes a communication error.
(c) When the "not ready for reception" state prevails after transmission data reception from the external device
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to the ENQ code reception from the outside.
(d) Transmission data received from the external device
● Error-free transmission data is stored in the IJ printer. The same contents are printed until different
transmission data is transmitted to the IJ printer.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the IJ printer printings remain unchanged.
In such an instance, retransmit the data beginning as explained in (b).
The retransmission count setup must be determined from the device side.
5-48 ●Communication Timing
(e) When a data transmission is aborted (the transmission of up to the ETX
● The IJ printer printings remain unchanged. For data retransmission, perform either of the following
procedures.
1 Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
2 Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line mode.
(2) In overwrite-enabled mode
On-line
Off-line
ENQ
ENQ
External
device
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
ENQ
STX
ETX
A
B
C
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ACK ACK
ENQ
STX DATA ETX
D
IJ printer
NAK
ACK
ACK
(No signal output)
Not ready
Readiness for
Ready for
for reception reception reception
Print start signal
Printing
operation
A
(a)
(b)
C
C
(c)
D
(d)
D
(e)
(a) When the IJ printer is off-line
● The NAK code is transmitted in response to an ENQ code reception from the outside..
(b) When the IJ printer is on-line
● Transmission data is received from the external device. When it contains no error, the ACK code is
transmitted. In this instance, the "ready for reception" state is maintained.
● If the data transmitted from the external device is in error, the NAK code is transmitted after receipt of
the ETX code.
In this instance, retransmit the data beginning.
(c) Data retransmission
● Transmission data is received from the external device, and subsequent transmission data is accepted.
In this case, the received data is accepted even if the DC2 (retransmission) code is not attached.
(d) Printing during reception
● While data is being received from the external device, the previously printed contents are printed.
(e) Transmission data received from the external device
● Error-free transmission data is stored in the IJ printer. The same contents are printed until different
transmission data is transmitted to the IJ printer.
(f) When a data transmission is aborted
(the transmission of up to the ETX code is not completed)
● The IJ printer printings remain unchanged. For data retransmission, perform either of the following
procedures.
1 Transmit the DC2 (retransmission) code to the IJ printer.
2 Press the Comm On/Off buttun to enter the off-line mode, and then switch back to the on-line mode.
●Communication Timing 5-49
(3) Switching print data with no occurrence of fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
The following shows the method of use with no occurrence of "Print data changeover in progress M" when
switching the print contents during transmission:
(a) Print timing schematic diagram
Print target
detector
Printing
Print target
detector
ABC
Print target
detector
ABC
ABC
Print target
detector
Print target
detector
DEF
DEF
Switching
Communication
DEF
1 The IJ printer receives contents "DEF" in communication while printing contents "ABC".
2 The IJ printer switches printing to the received contents: It will print the previous data during
switching.
Switching time
No.
1
2
3
Transmission type
Print description
Print data recall
Print conditions
Conditions
When the character height, character width,
character orientation, ink drop use percentage,
or print format changes before or after recall.
When the character height, character width,
character orientation, ink drop use percentage,
or print format does not change before or after
recall.
-
Maximum time
(ms)
100
500
100
500
● The fewer characters, the shorter the time.
● The fewer different time of the print format, the shorter the time.
(b) Restrictions
Perform communications only under the conditions shown below. If even one of these conditions is not met, any
input to print target detector while the communicated contents are being printed will cause fault "Print data
changeover in progress M" to occur.
Conditions that the print target detector input will not cause an abnormality
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Conditions
Make sure that none of the following software options are provided:
Barcode Reader Connection (SOP-08)
Set the Print data changeover on User environment setup screen to "Disable".
Set the Communication mode on Communication environment setup screen to "overwrite-enabled".
Set the Buffer function on Communication environment setup screen to "Disable".
Transmit print contents independently, and do not package print content transmission with print
condition transmission.
Transmit to print items with no count block.
Do not transmit the count characters.
5-50 ●Communication Timing
5.5.2 Response Time
5.5.2-1 Time interval (T1) between external device communication and
IJ printer response
External device
ENQ
STX
IJ printer
………
ETX
ACK
ACK
T0
T1
Baud rate (bps)
150 to 1200
2400 to 115200
T0 Maximum time (ms)
5
1
(1) When Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
Time interval T1 when Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
No. Transmission type
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
1 Print description
2 Print data recall
Print data
3
registration
4
5
Print conditions
6
7
Free layout
8
User pattern
character
9 Date/time setup
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
Print specifications
Print format
Line count /
print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
10
M
+25
10
45
Remarks
*1
M
+75
10
*1 *2
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
characters)
characters)
5
30
1800
1800
10
20
10
50
20
50
100
100
M+10
M+10
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
patterns)
patterns)
5
5
*3
15
15
Error reset
10 Remote operation Operation start, operation stop,
20
50
deflection voltage control
● When the Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall" and Free layout transmission is made,
a communication error will occur.
*1 For "t=fixed" and "t=async.", see Section 5.2.1, "Setting Communication Environment ".
*2 When there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
*3 If time changes just before 3ACK transmission, ACK transmission may be delayed about 20 ms.
Time T1 when there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Barcode type
Character size
Within 24 items
25 items or more
100
8×N+20
5×8
Data matrix
150
12×16, 18×24
15×N+40
QR (21×21)
200×N
200×N
QR code
QR (25×25)
300×N
300×N
QR (29×29)
400×N
400×N
GS1 DataBar
15×N+30
15× N+30
(N : Number of Barcode)
●Communication Timing 5-51
(2) When Print format is set to "Free layout"
Time interval T1 when Print format is set to "Free layout"
No. Transmission type
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
1 Print description
2 Print data recall
Print data
3
registration
4
5
Print conditions
6
7 Free layout
8
User pattern
character
9 Date/time setup
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
Print specifications
Print format
Line count /
print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
Error reset
Operation start,
10 Remote operation
operation stop,
deflection voltage control
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
60
120
M
+110
10
M
+270
10
1800
1800
20
20
20
50
-
-
Remarks
*4
*4
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
*5
communication
communication
characters)
characters)
30
30
100
100
20
20
M+10
M+10
(M: Number of
(M: Number of
communication
communication
patterns)
patterns)
5
5
*6
15
15
100
250
● When the Print format is set to "Free layout" and Print condition transmission of "Line count/Print
format uniformity" is made, a communication error will occur.
*4 For "t=fixed" and "t=async.", see Section 5.2.1, "Setting Communication Environment ".
*5 When there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
*6 If time changes just before 3ACK transmission, ACK transmission may be delayed about 20 ms.
Time T1 when there is a data matrix , QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
T1 Maximum time (ms)
Barcode type
Character size
Within 24 items
25 items or more
58
250
5× 8
Data matrix
85
600
12×16, 18×24
300
600
QR (21×21)
400
600
QR code
QR (25×25)
500
700
QR (29×29)
GS1 DataBar
60
250
(N : Number of Barcode)
5-52 ●Communication Timing
5.5.2-2 Time interval (T2) between IJ printer response and printing start
External
device
ETX
IJ printer
STX
ENQ
ACK
ACK
5ms (*7)
T2
Print start signal
Printing
operation
(1)When Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
Time interval T2 when Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall"
No. Transmission type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Print description
Print data recall
9
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
When the character height, character
width, character orientation, ink drop
use percentage, or print format changes
before or after recall
When the character height,
character width, character orientation,
ink drop use percentage, or print format
does not change before or after recall
Print conditions
User pattern
character
Date/time setup
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
M
+15
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
M
+30
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
Remarks
*8 *11
0
0
400
400
*9
40
40
*10
-
30
30
Line count / print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
400
400
200
200
-
400
400
200
200
-
-
25
25
Print data
registration
Free layout
8
Conditions
Print specifications
Print format
-
M
+15
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
M
+30
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
*9
*9
*10
*8
● The IJ printer executes an internal process to make printing preparations in accordance with the received print
data. Do not enter the print start signal during internal process execution.
● In the overwrite-protected mode, initiate the next communication after completion of printing.
● In the overwrite-enabled mode, the next communication can be transmitted during printing, but the ACK/
NAK response does not return until the ongoing printing operation is complete. (t=async.)
● When a print start signal is input with shorter timing than T2, the fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
occurs.
● The more different items of the print format, the longer the time until ready to print.
● When the Print format is set to "Individual" or "Overall" and Free layout transmission is made,
a communication error will occur.
*7 If the communication time interval is not sufficiently secured, it may not operate normally.
*8 When there is a data matrix and QR code setting, the time is as follows:
*9 When there is a QR code setting, T2 Minimum time is 400xN (ms) (N : Number of QR codes).
*10 When there is a QR code setting, the time is as follows:
*11 When there is a GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
●Communication Timing 5-53
Time T2 when there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
Barcode type
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
100
8×N+20
150
15×N+40
200×N
200×N
300×N
300×N
400×N
400×N
15×N+30
15×N+30
Character size
5×8
12×16, 18×24
QR (21×21)
QR (25×25)
QR (29×29)
Data matrix
QR code
GS1 DataBar
(N : Number of Barcode)
(2) When Print format is set to "Free layout"
Time interval T2 when Print format is set to "Free layout"
No. Transmission type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Print description
Print data recall
Conditions
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=fixed.
The print message transfer
ACK condition is t=async.
When the character height, character
width, character orientation, ink drop
use percentage, or print format changes
before or after recall
When the character height,
character width, character orientation,
ink drop use percentage, or print format
does not change before or after recall
Free layout
User pattern
character
Date/time setup
M
+50
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
M
+150
10
(M: Number of
communication
characters)
0
0
400
400
40
250
-
150
250
Line count / print format uniformity
Format setup change
-
400
400
200
400
400
400
250
400
-
25
25
Print data
registration
Print conditions
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
Print specifications
Print format
-
M
+50
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
M
+150
10
(M: Number of
printing
characters)
Remarks
*12
*12
*12
● The IJ printer executes an internal process to make printing preparations in accordance with the received print
data. Do not enter the print start signal during internal process execution.
● In the overwrite-protected mode, initiate the next communication after completion of printing.
● In the overwrite-enabled mode, the next communication can be transmitted during printing, but the ACK/
NAK response does not return until the ongoing printing operation is complete. (t=async.)
● When a print start signal is input with shorter timing than T2, the fault "Print data changeover in progress M"
occurs.
● The more different items of the print format, the longer the time until ready to print.
● When the Print format is set to "Free layout" and Print condition transmission of "Line count/Print format
uniformity" is made, a communication error will occur.
5-54 ●Communication Timing
*7 If the communication time interval is not sufficiently secured, it may not operate normally.
*12 When there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting, the time is as follows:
Time T2 when there is a data matrix, QR code and GS1 DataBar setting
Barcode type
T2 Minimum time (ms)
Within 24 items
25 items or more
58
250
85
600
300
600
400
600
500
700
60
250
Character size
5 ×8
12×16, 18×24
QR (21×21)
QR (25×25)
QR (29×29)
Data matrix
QR code
GS1 DataBar
(N : Number of Barcode)
5.5.2-3 On-line/Off-line Transmission
Off-line
External device
ESC2
On-line
73H
ESC2
IJ printer
Off-line
74H
ACK
ACK
T
T
T Maximum time (ms)
50
5.5.2-4 Current time output Transmission
T
External device
ESC2
75H
IJ printer
ACK
STX
Baud rate (bps)
150 to 1200
2400 to 115200
Text
ETX
T Maximum time (ms)
15
5
●Communication Timing 5-55
5.6 Communication Monitor Function
● The contents of serial communications between the external device and IJ printer are displayed.
● Up to 3,000 bytes of data can be acquired at a time.
● When you press the Start button, the system erases monitored data and acquires new data.
● When you press the USB output button, the communication description which is displayed on screen
can be output to USB memory.
Comm. monitor
[Ready
]
Com=1
2015.07.07 12:45
Blue : DLE2,ESC2,DLE,ESC Red : Failed line
No Trans.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
R
S
R
S
R
S
R
S
Communication description
05
06
02 10 31 41 42 43 44 45 10 32 31 32 33 34 35 03
06
05
06
02 10 31 41 42 43 44 45 10 32 31 32 33 34 7F 03
15
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Abort
USB output
Start
Detection
Disable Enable
Proc. status:Halted
Back
(1) Screen display
Item
Trans.
Communication
description
Proc. status
Description
External device → IJ printer
: R (Receive)
IJ printer
→ External device : S (Send)
Sended/received data are displayed in hexadecimal notation. Sixteen bytes of
data are displayed per line.
The current status is indicated (monitoring or interrupted).
(2) Input keys
Item
Start
Abort
Error detection
Previous list/
Next list
USB output
Back
5-56 ●Communication Monitor Function
Description
Starts exercising the line monitor function. Erases the monitored
information.
Aborts the execution of the line monitor function.
This switches over whether the system is to detect error-ridden locations.
● Disable: The system will not detect error-ridden locations. The system
will memorize up to bytes 3,000 of data transmitted and received.
● Enable: The system will display error-ridden locations in red. The system
will memorize up to transmitted and received data up to the location where
an error was detected.
Used to switch to another screen when the amount of information to be
displayed is too large to fit on a single screen.
The Communication description which is displayed on screen can be output
to USB memory.
Returns you to the maintenance menu.
(3) Explanation of USB output function.
● When you press the USB output button, the Communication description which is displayed on screen can
be output to a USB memory.
● The Communication description which is displayed on screen can be output to a USB memory.
when "Comm. monitor"screen is displayed AND Comm. monitor is in "Halted" status.
● The Communication description is output in a Text file format.
● Explanation of file composition and file name.
・RXCLOG holder is automatically created right below the USB memory.
・The Communication description is output in the name of LOG_Serial number_YYMMDDhhmmss.txt
right below the RXCLOG holder.
USB Memory
RXCLOG  LOG_Serial number_YYMMDDhhmmss.txt
YYMMDDhhmmss stands
for Year, Month, Date, Hour,
Minute and Second.
● Explanation of content of output.
・A Target port is output in the lead, such as "Standard" for the standard port and "Secondary" for the
expansion port.
・Compositions of the Text file are output in the order of No., Trans, and Communication description.
(No.: 4 digit number; Trans.: "S" for sending and "R" for receiving.)
・An asterisk (*) is output in front of the error part when an error was detected.
(Example of output text file)
Standard
A Target port is output.
0001,R,05,
0002,S,06,
0003,R,02,10,31,41,42,43,44,45,10,32,31,32,33,34,35,03,
0004,S,06,
It is an error part.
0005,R,05,
0006,S,06,
0007,R,02,10,31,41,42,43,44,45,10,32,31,32,33,34, *7F, 03,
0008,S,15,
Trans. is output with "S" for sending and "R" for receiving.
No. is output in 4 digit number.
● Explanation of content of notes.
・The data is NOT output by pressing the USB output button if the Communication description does NOT
Exist.
・The data is NOT output by pressing the USB output button when the Line monitor is in operation.
・<USB Memory Error> is displayed when the USB memory is NOT installed on the IJP.
・<USB Memory Error> is displayed when the USB memory runs out of its capacity.
・The data is overwritten if the same file name already exists in the USB memory.
・Do NOT remove the USB memory when the USB data output is in process.
●Communication Monitor Function 5-57
5.7 Warning Messages
● If any communication is in error, the associated warning message appears below the status display area.
● Note the message to confirm the error and then take remedial action as appropriate for the indicated error
code.
Print description
[Ready
Message name[
]
]
Warning
Com=1
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID : user2
Warning
M
Manual Shutdown
−
+
Interlaced
Ink operating time
100(hours)
Cumulative op. time
100(hours)
0.250(MPa;standard value:0.250)
Ink pressure
Maintenance
Print count
reset
1000(prints)
Print count
Auxiliary
function
Environment
setup menu
Select
login user
Create/Edit
message
Menu
Error code table
Error
code
Name
Description
● The transmitted code was not defined
for communication use.
● The transmitted message had an illegal
structure.
Print specifications The print specifications data value was
002
code error
illegal.
The maximum value was exceeded by
Print character code
003
the number of characters for printings
error
that could be received as one item.
004 Item number error The item number code value was illegal.
005 Header error
The header value was illegal.
● An attempt was made to establish
communication while the "not ready
for reception" state prevailed.
● "Apply" key and message window
were both displayed.
Ready-for006
● "Off-line fixed" has been set in
reception error
Communication environment.
● Communication monitor screen was
displayed.
● Communication was conducted during
the stop or shutdown process.
Print specifications The maximum value was exceeded by
008
code error
the print specifications data.
Transmissioncode
001
error
009 ETX code error
The ETX code position was illegal.
010 DLE code error
The DLE code position was illegal.
011 STX code error
The STX code position was illegal.
012 ENQ code error
The ENQ code position was illegal.
ESC code error
(ESC, ESC2)
The ESC code position was illegal.
013
5-58 ●Warning Messages
Check
Check the baud rate and transmission
code.
Check the print specifications
communication text.
Check the printings communication text.
Check the printings communication text.
Check the header.
Check the transmission timing.
Check the print specifications
communication text.
Check the transmission procedure and
ETX code.
Check the transmission procedure and
DLE code.
Check the transmission procedure and
STX code.
Check the transmission procedure and
ENQ code.
Check the transmission procedure and
ESC code.
Error
Name
code
014 Parity error
Print format code
015
error
016 Overrun error
017 Framing error
019
020
021
022
023
024
026
027
Description
Check
The parity error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
Check the print format transmission text
The print format data value was illegal.
section.
The overrun error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
The framing error occurred.
Check the baud rate and data format.
● An illegal 2-byte code (2 bytes per
character) was transmitted.
2-byte code error
Check the 2-byte code transmission text.
● Only one byte of 2-byte code was
transmitted.
● The print data registration number was
illegal.
Check the print data recall / transmission
Print data code error
● An unregistered number was
code.
encountered.
The SI (shift in) or SO (shift out) code
SI/SO code error
Check the printings communication text.
position was illegal.
User pattern
The character size or character code
Check the user pattern communication
character size/
values were illegal.
text.
character code error
● When necessary conditions for high
speed printing were not satisfied, NM
or QM mode was transmitted.
High-speed
Check the print specifications
● When High speed printing NM or QM
printing setup error
communication text.
mode was set, a setting which did not
satisfy necessary conditions for high
speed printing was transmitted.
● Transmitted to block where
calendar/count characters were not
present.
Calendar/count
Check calendar/count condition
● Set value was outside specifications.
conditions error
communication text.
● Zero suppression transmission was
performed to print item for which
barcode had been set.
● A character undefined for bar code use
was found in the printings.
● The number for ITF did not consist of
an even number of numerals
Check the printings print format
Bar code setup error beginning with an odd digit position. communication text.
● The input data for EAN-13 was not
numeric.
● The number of DM, QR code, Micro
QR code or GS1 DataBar is 2 or more
when Format setup is Free Layout.
● A dedicated character or katakana was
transmitted in a character size which
cannot be inputted.
Printings error
● The three characters of a dedicated
Check the printings communication text
character string were not properly
grouped.
● A count value is out of a count range.
●Warning Messages 5-59
Error
code
031
Name
Create messages
error
Setting conditions
error
033 Setting range error
032
Free layout
transmission036
Communication
error
Free layout
037 transmissionSetup error
Free layout
038 transmissionReflection error
Free layout
transmission039
Format setup
reflection error
Free layout
transmission040 Format setup
communication
error
5-60 ●Warning Messages
Description
● While "Create messages" function was
operating, on-line transmission was
performed.
● On-line transmission was performed
when print data which was controlled
separately from data created and
registered by print description screen,
was present.
● Setting value does not satisfy the
required conditions.
● Setting value is out of stipulated range.
● Free layout transmission was made
when Format setup is "Individual" or
"Overall".
● "Free layout" is transmitted to Basic
machine.
● The specified item number does not
exist.
● Character other than "+" or "-" is input
to Horizontal sign or Vertical sign.
● Set value of the Coordinate or
Horizontal/Vertical dot count is
invalid.
When the item was moved by Free
layout transmission, the item after move
went to the area other than Free layout
area.
● When the Print content was changed
by Print content transmission, the print
item after move went to the area other
than Free layout area.
● When Character size, Inter-character
spacing, Bold, or Barcode of the item
is changed by Print condition transmission, the print item after move
went to the area other than Free layout
area.
When the Format setup is set to "Free
layout", Print condition transmission of
"Line count/Print format uniformity",
"Line count, Line spacing", "High speed
printing" or "Ink drop charge rule" was
made.
Check
Check the timing of on-line
transmission.
Communication text re-check.
Communication text re-check.
Check the Communication text.
Check the free layout communication
text.
Check the free layout communication
text.
Check the Printings text and Print format
communication text.
Check the Communication text.
5.8 Precautions
5.8.1 Notes on Product speed matching Feature Use
(1) If the product speed matching signal cannot be entered during printing, the printing state
continues to prevail so that communication may not be established (no response can be made).
If such a situation is encountered, perform procedure 1 or 2 below.
1 Enter the standby state and then initiate the communication.
2 Issue the print abort code "DC3". After the IJ printer returns an "ACK" response,
(2) Number of pulses necessary for a rotary encoder from print signal detection until the start of
printing.
Number of pulses necessary = Number of printing preparation pulses ( 1 ) + Print start delay.
1 Number of printing preparation pulses = A / 1 scan time
Use an integer by rounding up the fractional portion.
Nozzle diameter
65μm
1 scan time =
Value of A
5.5
(Vertical dot count + character width setting) X Ink drop use percentage
Excitation frequency (kHz)
(ms)
When “Speed compensation” is enabled, print start is delayed for 30 scans.
5.8.2 Notes on Print Condition Transmission
(1) The number of digits for character height data is 2 by default. However, the preceding IJ printer
models GX and HX use 3 digits by default for print condition transmission (optional function). If the
new model of the IJ printer is used as a replacement for such a predecessor, open the following
screen from the communication environment setup screen and change the number of digits for
character height data to 3.
<Standard communication>
overwrite-protected overwrite-enabled
Communication mode
Print message transfer ACK
t=fixed
t=async.
Print spec transfer char height
2 digits
3 digits
Back
Data digts of the character height
● Character height (when the 3-digit data format is chosen)
ESC
Header 30H
100s place
10s place
Units place
Character height (000 to 099)
Note: If the value is within the range from 100 to 999, an error occurs.
●Precautions 5-61
5.9 Communication Buffer
5.9.1 Overview
(1) Print content transmission
● The print contents received through print content transmission will not be reflected in printing
immediately, but will be temporarily held in buffer.
● The print contents are fetched from the buffer one by one for each printing, and reflected in subsequent
printing.
[Example of transmitting print contents constantly during printing]
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
Print content
transmission
Detection of print
start signal
IJ printer
Printing
Printing
[Example of transmitting collective print contents at the beginning]
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
IJ printer
Printing
5-62 ●Communication Buffer
A
B
C
D
5.9.2 Description of Functions
(1) Application procedure
● Prepare the following in advance:
Preliminary Preparation Items
No.
Procedure
1 Specify "overwrite-enabled" for communication mode on the communication environment screen.
In addition, specify "t=fixed" for print message transfer ACK.
2 Set the buffer function on the second page of the communication environment setting screen to
"enable."
3 Confirm the setting values for "Buffer repeat count", "Empty Buffer Fault", "Timing of Fault" and
"Data number at Fault" on the second page of the communication environment setting screen.
Setting items of communication environment setting screen
Setting items
Buffer function
Description
Initial values
Selects enable/disable for buffer function.
Disable
Sets how many times printing is to be executed before switching the
Buffer repeat count
1
printing contents.
Selects whether or not communication buffer errors are to be
Empty Buffer Fault generated. The conditions for occurrence are set by "Timing of
Disable
Fault" and "Data number at Fault".
Selects timing by which communication buffer errors are to be
Timing of Fault
Print Start
generated.
Sets the number of print data items by which a communication
Data number at Fault
0
buffer error is to be generated.
Comm. env. setup
Buffer function
Buffer repeat count
Empty Buffer Fault
[Stop
Disable
]
2015.07.07 12:45
Enable
0001 (1〜9999)
Disable
Com=0
Enable
Timing of Fault
Print Start
Data Number at Fault
0
M
Manual
Startup
Print. Complete
HOME
(0〜9)
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Back
● The function (application) will be valid only when the printer is online and in the ready status.
Offline will set to standard-mode printing.
● The following shows the application procedure :
Application Procedure
No.
Procedure
1 Switch to online.
Procedure No.1 and 2 can be in random order
2 Set to the ready status.
Transmit print contents accordingly so that print contents sent at least N times remain in the buffer.
3
(N: Data number at Fault)
4 Print.
5 Subsequently repeat steps 3 and 4 above.
●Communication Buffer 5-63
(2) Buffer
● The print content receive buffer has a queue structure (beginning with oldest data, in sequence).
● Print content is fetched from the buffer for each printing.
● Once the Ready status is set, the first print content will be fetched from the buffer.
● The buffer capacity is 100 print items (total 1000 chracters). An alarm will be raised if it exceeded its
capacity.
● The buffer will be cleared when offline is set.
● The buffer is always empty immediately after power is turned on.
● The buffer will not be cleared even if the status is changed to that other than the print enable status.
● When offline is switched to online, the contents in buffer will be cleared, and then the standard-mode print
operation will continue. In this case, print contents of at the time it was changed offline will be printed,
then subsequently same print contents will be printed. However, this option feature will be effective again
by reconfiguring the setting according to the procedure described in the previous page.
● If printing is interrupted because of some fault (print overlap fault, etc.), printing will restart from the
subsequent data in buffer.
(3) Character types available
● Calendar characters and count characters are not available.
● To use user pattern characters, define them in advance using "Create user pattern" function. Undefined
user pattern characters will be printed as spaces.
(4) Examples of operational procedure
(Example 1) Normal operation:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
E
Print content
transmission
F
IJ printer
Detection of print
start signal
Ready
Printing
A
B
Printing
C
(Example 2) When status is restored to that other than ready during normal operation, and printing
is to restart in ready status:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
IJ printer
Ready
Printing
5-64 ●Communication Buffer
(Example 3) When offline is restored during normal operation, and printing is subsequently
performed in standard mode:
Online
External device
A
B
C
D
IJ printer
Ready
Printing
B
A
B
B
B
(Example 4) Buffer repeat count is 2.
External device
A
B
C
IJ printer
A
Printing
A
B
B
(Example 5) Timing of Fault : Print completed, Data count when error occurs : 2
External device
A
B
C
D
IJ printer
Printing
A
B
A communication buffer fault occurs because the number of data in the buffer is
2 after B is printed.(C and D in the buffer are not printed)
(Example 6) Timing of Fault : Print started, Data count when error occurs : 0
External device
A
B
Detection of print
start signal
IJ printer
Printing
A
B
A communication buffer fault occurs because the number of data in the buffer
is 0 after B is printed followed by detection of print start signal.
●Communication Buffer 5-65
5.9.3 External Communications
5.9.3-1 Transmitting print contents
(1) Function
● The received print content will not be reflected in printing immediately, but temporarily held in buffer.
External device
ENQ
STX
IJ printer
DLE
Item
No.
Content
ETX
ACK
ACK
● To facilitate operation, first input fixed characters that do not need to be changed, and then transmit
only the print items to be changed.
(2) Restriction
● The maximum number of print items which can be sent at 1 time is 8 print items (maximum 80
characters).
5.9.3-2 Clearing buffer and restarting printing
(1) Function
● When text “clear buffer” is transmitted, the print contents held in buffer will be cleared.
● To restart printing, perform the following procedure after transmitting text "clear buffer".
If this procedure is not followed, the print contents stored before the buffer cleared may be printed.
1 Transmit print contents so that print contents sent at least N times remain in the buffer.
Procedure:
(N: Data number at Fault)
2 Transmit text "restart printing".
3 Printing is possible whenever the print start signal is input.
External device
STX
Header 76h : Clear buffer
Header 77h : Restart printing
ESC2 Header ETX
ACK
IJ printer
[Existing machine message] Existing machine message can also be used.
External device
STX
Header 2Dh : Clear buffer
Header 77h : Restart printing
ESC Header ETX
ACK
IJ printer
[Conceptual diagram of transmission procedure]
Online
External device
1
…
20
Clear
21
…
40
Restart
IJ printer
Ready
Standby
Ready
Print start signal
Printing
1
21
22
(2) Restriction
● Independently transmit text "clear buffer" or "restart printing": These cannot be transmitted with
another text (print content transmission, print data call-up transmission, etc.).
● Transmit text "clear buffer" or "restart printing" only while printing is not in progress.
● Input the print start signal at least 500 ms after ACK is returned to "restart printing".
5.9.3-3 Print data call-up transmission
(1) When calling up print data via communication, always execute the call-up before transmitting
data to the buffer. If call-up is executed in the Ready status, the called up print content will be
printed.
5-66 ●Communication Buffer
5.9.4 Errors
(1) Errors during external communications
Errors during print content transmission and print data call-up
No.
1
2
3
Condition
Type of error
NAK is returned.
Not all received print contents could be held in buffer because
However, this will not cause any
its capacity was exceeded
external communication error.
Number of print items of received contents is more than 9.
External communication error 030
Calendar or count character was included in print data call-up
External communication error 027
transmission
Error when buffer is cleared
No.
Condition
1 Text was transmitted together with another text
Type of error
External communication error 002
(2) Errors during printing
Errors during printing
No.
1
2
Condition
The number of received contents in buffer was less than "Data
number at Fault".
Print start signal was received during print data switching
immediately after ACK was returned to "restart printing"
Type of error
Fault "Communication Buffer
Fault"
Fault
"Invalid Data Change Timing"
● When "communication buffer fault" occurs, the window will be cleared, followed by standby
status.
(3) Error when status is changed
Error when status is changed
No.
1
Condition
Calendar characters or count characters were included to
existing print contents when restored to online.
Type of error
Confirmation message
"Communication buffer error"
●Communication Buffer 5-67
6. CIRCULATION SYSTEM WORK
AND ADJUSTMENT METHOD
WARNING
● Never pour the ink and makeup waste into a sewer, etc.
Have the ink and makeup drainage processed by an industrial waste processor as
special control industrial waste and used wiping papers and the empty container as
industrial waste.
● Do not remove, apply unreasonable force to, or bend the piping tubes unnecessarily.
Since high pressure is applied to parts of the ink and solvent inside the piping tube,
the ink and solvent may spurt out and get into your eyes and mouth or soil your
hands and clothing.
If the ink or solvent gets into your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse it out with warm
water and see a doctor.
● When replenishing the ink and makeup, changing the ink, or performing other work in
which the ink and makeup are handled, be sure not to spill the ink and makeup.
If the ink and makeup is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe it off with wiping paper, etc.
Do not close the maintenance cover until you verify that the wiped parts are
completely dry.
Since the ink and makeup vapor will collect inside the printer especially in the state in
which the ink and makeup was spilled inside the printer and was not wiped off
completely, it will cause ignition and fire.
When wiping is difficult in the energized state, perform shutdown processing with the
maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the power, then perform wiping
again.
● If leaking of the ink and makeup inside the printer was detected during printer
operation or maintenance, quickly wipe it with wiping paper, etc. and perform
shutdown processing with the maintenance cover remaining open and turn off the
power, then repair the leak.
If operation is continued when the ink and makeup is leaking, it will cause trouble
and prevent normal printing will become.
In addition, since the ink and makeup are combustible, they may cause a fire.
● The ink and makeup, their waste solution, used wiping papers and empty containers
are flammable. Waste disposal must comply with appropriate regulations.
Consult the appropriate regulatory agency for further information.
● When the ink particles are caught in a beaker during test printing, etc., use a
conductive beaker and securely connect the beaker to a ground.
In addition, be sure that the print head is not inserted into the beaker.
Since the ink particles used in printing are electrically charged, if the beaker is not
connected to a ground, the charge load will gradually increase and cause a fire.
CAUTION
● Pay careful attention to the following items regarding handling of the ink and makeup:
1 Wear gloves and goggles so that the ink and makeup will not directly contact your
skin.
If the ink or makeup gets on your skin, wash it off with soap and warm water.
2 When taking the ink or makeup in and out of the bottle, be sure that the ink or
makeup does not get on the equipment and surroundings. If the ink or makeup gets
on the equipment or surroundings, immediately wipe it off with makeup.
3 Since the vapor pressure of the makeup is generally high, if the ambient
temperature is high such as in the summer, etc., the internal pressure will rise and
makeup could spurt out when the outside cover is removed. Therefore, when
unplugging,
●do not hold the bottle near your face
●place the can on a level surface
●open while covering the opening with a rag, etc.
6-1 ●Circulation System Work and Adjustment Method
6.1 Circulation control screen operation
1
Start from the Maintenance menu.
Perform menu 1 and menu 2 switching using Prev. menu and Next menu .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
1st menu
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Proc. status:
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
Start/Continue
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink refill
Ink drainage
HOME
2nd menu
Pressure relief
Ink stream
alignment
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Cancel
Parts usage time
management
Circulation system
environment setup
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
2
Select the function you want to perform and press Start/Continue .
3
Different operation guides are displayed depending on the selected function.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide.
● When you want to stop operation, press Abort .
●Circulation control screen operation 6-2
6.2 Circulation control contents
● During generation of an “Main Ink Tank Too Full” fault, input from any of the keys is not accepted. Perform
operation after referring to par. “6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank” and clearing the fault.
● The receivable states are different depending on the contents of circulation control. Note that operation cannot
be performed from states other than those shown in the table below.
Circulation control name
Contents
Receivable state
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Used for startup at maintenance.
(Ink ejection only. The IJ printer does not enter the Ready
state.)
Stop
Cleaning stop
Normal shutdown processing. The nozzle is automatically
cleaned and the printer is stopped.
Ready or Standby
No-cleaning stop
Shutdown processing used when stopping temporarily.
Automatic nozzle cleaning is not performed.
Ready or Standby
Nozzle backwash
makeup is sucked in from the nozzle and the nozzle is
cleaned. Perform this operation while pouring makeup from
the cleaning bottle onto the nozzle tip (orifice plate surface).
Stop
makeup is sucked in from the gutter and cleaning of the
Gutter cleaning
recovery-line is performed. Perform this operation while
(Recovery-line cleaning) pouring makeup from the cleaning bottle onto the end of the
gutter.
Stop
Ink replacement
Used when replacing the ink inside the IJ printer with new
ink. This operation performs from ink drainage to refilling
consecutively.
Stop
Ink filter replacement
Used when replacing the ink filter. This operation performs
from ink drainage to refilling consecutively.
Stop
Ink circulation
Used when bleeding the air from inside the circulation line
and when making the ink inside the flow lines uniform. This
operation can be performed even while ink is being ejected.
At the end of this operation, the IJ printer enters the Eject ink
(standby) state.
Standby
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Used before printer is shutdown for a long time.
Stop
Process after
long-term shutdown
Used when the printer is restarted after long-term
shutdown.
Stop
Makeup refill
Used to fill the cleaning path with the makeup at the time of
printer installation.
Stop
Ink drainage
Used when draining the ink inside the ink drainage unit.
Stop
Used when refilling the IJ printer with ink. The amount of
ink in the main ink tank is set to the initial level. After refilling, the IJ printer enters the Eject ink (standby) state.
Stop
Depressurizes the inside the entire circulation system.
(Used when performing maintenance work.)
Stop
Used when adjusting the ink stream position. Ejects makeup
from the nozzle.
Stop
Ink refill
Pressure relief
Ink stream adjustment
Parts usage time
management
Used when managing the usage time of the circulation
system parts. Used when checking the amount of ink and
makeup consumption.
All status
Circulation system
environment setup
Used when selecting ink concentration management.
Stop
6-3 ●Circulation control contents
6.3 Replacing the ink
(1) Overview
● This operation is performed when replacing old ink with new ink.
● Consecutively performs from ink drainage to ink replacement to ink refilling.
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
*If replacement of the filters is matched to replacement of the ink, ink will not be wasted.
*When performing ink drainage or ink refilling separately, proceed by selecting each function at menu
2 of the Circulation control screen.
(2) Operation
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Ink replacement →
Start/Continue .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Ink replacement
Ink replacement
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink filter
replacement
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
2
Proc. status:
Start/Continue
Drain ink in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
● When you want to stop drainage, press Abort .
● When abort processing was performed, repeat operation from step 1 .
(a) Change the direction of the ink filter so that tubes become the bottom, disconnect the
recovery block from the main ink tank and put it in a beaker.
Recovery tube
Ink filter
Ink filter tubes
●Replacing the ink 6-4
● Remove the recovery tube, connect it to the accessory drainage tube and put it into the beaker.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Keep the drain tube clean with
makeup after it is used.
Otherwise, the pressure in the
recovery line rises by the clogged
ink, and it may cause a damage of
the circulation pump.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Beaker
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or something similar.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
6-5 ●Replacing the ink
(b) Press the Start/Continue key.
The ink in the printer is drained from the drainage tube.
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to return the
recovery tube to its original position and press the Start/Continue key .
You are then returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, perform the procedure from 1 again.
* When aborting the operation, be sure to return the recovery tube to its original position.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, follow the operation guidance on the
screen and place the recovery block of the Main ink tank block to original position.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Ink rep.
Process:Ink replacement
Operation guide
Ink refill
Connect a recovery tube to the main ink tank as before.
Press [Start/Continue].
*1 Clean the connection at the end of the recovery tube sufficiently with the makeup ink,
and then connect it as it originally was.
*2 To prevent the recovery tube from becoming crimped, be careful not to let it cross
another tube.
3
Refill the IJ printer with ink.
Circulation control
[Service
Process:Ink replacement
Operation guide
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Ink rep.
Ink refill
Put ink into the ink reservoir.
When ready press [Start/Continue].
(a) Pull out the reservoir.
Ink reservoir
Pull out
●Replacing the ink 6-6
(b) Remove the cap, then drain the ink remaining in the ink reservoir.
* Clean the inside of the reservoir with makeup.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
Ink reservoir
Beaker
Cap
(c) Fill the reservoir with new ink.
* Fill the reservoir at least 2/3 full of the ink. Be careful of overfilling.
CAUTION
Ink reservoir
Cap
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
(d) Fasten the cap of the ink reservoir.
● Fasten it securely. Solvent components may evaporate.
(e) Push in the reservoir to return it to the original position.
(f) Place the end of the print head in a beaker.
● Provide against an ink beam bend.
(g) Press the Start/Continue key.
6-7 ●Replacing the ink
(h) Set the ink filter.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Process:Ink replacement
Ink rep.
Operation guide
Ink refill
Confirm the ink filter is set at the right position.
Press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
● Set the ink filter as follows.(Piping D is on the right.)
Piping(D)
Ink filter
(i) When Start/Continue is pressed, refilling of the lines with ink begins.
● After a while, ink is ejected from the nozzle. Check the position of the ink stream.
● When you want to stop the operation, press Abort .
● When abort processing was performed, select “Ink refill” from the Circulation control screen and
execute.
4
Display the Operation management screen and set the ink operating time to “0”.
●Replacing the ink 6-8
6.4 How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water and consult a
doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
6.4.1 Nozzle backwash
● Sucks in makeup from the nozzle and remove clinging foreign matter, etc.
● To prevent thinning of the ink, do not perform this more than 3 consecutive times.
● Do not perform this work while the ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the
Stop state.
1
Procure a cleaning bottle filled with makeup and a beaker and remove the print
head cover.
2
Press the Maintenance menu Circulation control → Nozzle backwash .
The nozzle backwash screen is displayed.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Function:Nozzle backwash
Operation guide
Use the cleaning bottle to sprinkle makeup
over the nozzle.
Abort
Abort
Proc. time:Approx. 1 minute.
Proc. status;
3
Suction begins automatically. Sprinkle the nozzle orifice with makeup.
Cleaning bottle
Nozzle orifice
Beaker
6-9 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
4
Suction ends in about 1 minute and the screen returns to the Circulation
control screen.
● To stop operation, press Abort .
5
Check if ink stream bending or nozzle clogging has been repaired.
● Display the screen after the Circulation control screen.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink refill
Ink drainage
HOME
Ink stream
Pressure relief
alignment
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Cancel
Parts usage time
Circulation system
management
environment setup
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
6
Proc. status:
With the print head cover removed, press the Ink stream alignment →
Start/Continue to eject the makeup.
● Perform this work with the print head tip inserted into a beaker.
7
Confirm that the stream is in the center of the gutter.
● Confirm the stream position from the horizontal direction and vertical direction of the print head
as shown in the figure.
Stream
Gutter entrance diameter
Center of gutter inlet
Upper direction
Gutter
Side direction
● If the ink stream is not in the center of the gutter, perform nozzle backwash again.
If the stream is not corrected even after the nozzle backwash has been performed 3 times,
perform par. “6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning”.
8
At the end of confirmation, press Abort and stop ejection of the makeup.
●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging 6-10
6.4.2 Nozzle orifice disassembly and cleaning
● This is the processing method when ink stream bending or nozzle clogging is not repaired
even when nozzle backwash was performed.
● Do not perform this work while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer
to the Stop state.
● Do not touch the ejection port of the nozzle orifice directly with your hand.
(Use the accessory tweezers.)
● If the ejection port of the nozzle orifice is damaged, it may be impossible to
fulfill its function.
Handle the nozzle orifice carefully so that the ejection port is not damaged by the tool.
1
Ejection port of
the nozzle orifice
Remove and clean the nozzle orifice.
(a) Loosen the fixing screw and remove the charge electrode and deflection electrode.
To prevent dropping, do not remove the screw.
Charge electrode
Fixing screw
Deflection electrode(-)
Deflection electrode(+)
(b) Remove the four screws holding the nozzle orifice.
Nozzle orifice
(c) Use the tweezers to remove the nozzle orifice from the nozzle body.
O-ring
Tweezers
Notice
Do not touch the ink ejection
port on nozzle orifice.
Ejection port
The O-ring may detach from the nozzle orifice at this time. If it does, put the O-ring in a
beaker with makeup ink and take care not to lose it.
(d) Place the removed nozzle orifice into a beaker containing makeup and clean the orifice.
6-11 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
2
Clean the nozzle section.
Using the cleaning bottle, pour the makeup over the nozzle section to clean it, from which the
nozzle orifice has been removed.
Cleaning bottle
Beaker
3
Install the nozzle orifice.
(a) Use the tweezers to hold the O-ring and put it into
the nozzle body.
O-ring
(b) Use the cleaning bottle and splash a few
droplets of makeup on the O-ring.
O ring
Cleaning bottle
(c) Insert the nozzle orifice and use tweezers to
lightly depress the nozzle orifice from the top.
Nozzle orifice
Notice
Do not touch the ink ejection
port on nozzle orifice.
Ejection port
●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging 6-12
(d) Remove the nozzle orifice once and make sure
that the O-ring has been installed.
O-ring
Attach to the groove
(e) Remove the nozzle orifice, and use the four
screws to secure it.
● Use the four screws to secure the nozzle orifice so that
the characters on it face up.
Charge electrode
Upper
Characters
6A0012
Nozzle orifice
3
Lower
● Tighten the four screws little by little alternately.
(f) Reinstall the charge electrode and deflection
electrode.
4
Press the Ink stream alignment → Start/Continue and confirm that bending of
the stream and clogging of the nozzle have been repaired.
● Perform this operation with the tip of the print head inserted into a beaker.
● When the ink stream is way outside the gutter, cleaning of the nozzle orifice may not be sufficient.
Disassemble and clean the nozzle orifice again.
● When the ink stream position has deviated from the center of the gutter, adjust it in accordance
with par. “6.5 Stream alignment”.
6-13 ●How to correct ink stream bending and nozzle clogging
6.5 Stream alignment
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water and consult a
doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
This operation is performed when the nozzle or nozzle orifice has been replaced. Ordinarily, ink stream
alignment is unnecessary.
● Adjust the stream position so that the stream ejected from the nozzle is at the center of the gutter.
● Adjustment in 2 directions, horizontal direction and vertical direction, is necessary.
1
Remove the print head cover in the stop state.
Loosen the screw.
Pull out.
Print head cover
2
At the Circulation control screen, press the Ink stream alignment →
Start/Continue .
● Perform this operation with the print head tip inserted into a beaker.
●Stream alignment 6-14
3
Adjust the horizontal direction and vertical direction positions.
(a) Horizontal direction adjustment procedure
1 Slightly loosen the horizontal direction lock screws (2).
As to the screw loosening, please see the precautions below.
2 Turn the horizontal direction adjustment screw and adjust the position of the makeup.
When you want to move in the minus electrode direction : Turn clockwise
When you want to move in the plus electrode direction
: Turn counterclockwise
Adjust so that the stream is approximately at the center of the gutter.
3 After adjustment, tighten the horizontal direction lock screws (2).
Minus deflection
electrode
Horizontal direction
lock screw
PERCAUTIONS
Horizontal
direction
Horizontal direction lock screw.
Indication of the
loosening
[60 degree to
120 degree]
Stream
Plus deflection
electrode
Horizontal direction
adjustment screw
Gutter
● It will be difficult to make fine
adjustment when the lock
screw is loosed too much
because the resistance from
the base is lost then.
(b) Vertical direction adjustment procedure
1 Slightly loosen the vertical direction lock screw (2).
2 Turn the vertical direction adjustment screw and adjust the position of the stream.
When you want to move to the bottom of the gutter : Turn counterclockwise
When you want to move to the top of the gutter
: Turn clockwise
Adjust so that the stream is approximately at the center of the gutter.
3 After adjustment, tighten the vertical direction lock screw (2).
Vertical direction
adjustment screw
Vertical
direction
Stream
Vertical direction
lock screw
Gutter
4
At the end of adjustment, press Abort .
6-15 ●Stream alignment
6.6 Cleaning the Gutter
● When the ink recovery system becomes dry or clogged, the line from the gutter to the ink main tank can be
cleaned by performing “Gutter cleaning”.
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
● Have ready a cleaning bottle filled with makeup and a beaker and remove the print head cover.
● If recovery-line cleaning is performed continuously, the ink will become thin and cause printing distortion.
Since ink replacement may become necessary after repair, do not perform cleaning more than 2 consecutive
times.
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Gutter cleaning →
Start/Continue .
2
Perform cleaning in accordance with the operation guide.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Function:Gutter cleaning
Proc. time:Approx. 1 minute.
Proc. status:
● Pour makeup onto the gutter.
Gutter
Cleaning bottle
Beaker
● To stop operation, press Abort .
3
Cleaning ends in about 1 minute and the screen returns to the Circulation
control screen.
●Cleaning the Gutter 6-16
6.7 Replacing the ink filter
Perform it in a state in which the ink has been drained. The ink is not wasted if performed
simultaneously with the ink replacement.
1
Display the Circulation control screen and press the Ink filter replacement →
Start/Continue .
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
Cleaning stop
(Goes to Standby)
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Recovery-line
cleaning
Nozzle backwash
Ink replacement
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Proc. status:
Start/Continue
2 2Follow the operation guidance on the screen and drain the ink from the ink
filter and ink circulation system.
● Press Abort to cancel ink draining.
● When Abort is selected, go back to setup 1 above and continue.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or equivalent.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped area
is completely dried.
(a) Change the direction of the ink filter so that tubes become the bottom,
disconnect the recovery block from the main ink tank and put it in a beaker.
Recovery tube
Ink filter
Ink filter tubes
6-17 ●Replacing the ink filter
● Remove the recovery tube, connect it to the accessory drainage tube and put it into the beaker.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Keep the drain tube clean with
makeup after it is used.
Otherwise, the pressure in the
recovery line rises by the clogged
ink, and it may cause a damage of
the circulation pump.
Recovery tube
Drainage tube
Beaker
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up promptly with wiping paper or equivalent.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you are sure that the wiped area
is completely dried.
(b) Press the Start/Continue key.
The ink in the printer is drained from the drainage tube.
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key. Then, follow the on-screen instructions to return the
recovery tube to its original position and press the Start/Continue key .
You are then returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, perform the procedure from 1 again.
* When aborting the operation, be sure to return the recovery tube to its original position.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, follow the operation guidance on the
screen and place the recovery block of the Main ink tank block to original position.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Process:Ink filter replacement
Operation guide
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Filter rep.
Ink refill
Connect a recovery tube to the main ink tank as before.
Press [Start/Continue].
*1 Clean the connection at the end of the recovery tube sufficiently with the makeup,
and then connect it as it originally was.
*2 To prevent the recovery tube from becoming crimped, be careful not to let it cross
another tube.
●Replacing the ink filter 6-18
3
When the operation guide “Replace ink filter -----” is displayed, replace ink
filter with a new one.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Process:Ink filter replacement
Ink rep.
Operation guide
Ink refill
Replace ink filter with a new one.
Put ink into the ink reservoir.
When ready press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
(a) Disconnect piping joints C and D and connect them to a new ink filter.
[Connect piping joints]
[Disconnect piping joints]
Piping joints C
Piping joints D
C
C
D
C
D
D
C
D
Lock release
New ink filter
Use ink filter
CAUTION
1 The joints cannot be installed if the installation position of the piping is incorrect.
(C is at the center of the ink filter and D is at the outside.)
2 When installing, always lock piping joints C and D by turning them clockwise.
3 A small amount of ink will remain inside the ink filter even after ink drainage.
Be careful that the ink does not spill when handling the used ink filter.
6-19 ●Replacing the ink filter
(b) Set the ink filter as follows. (Piping joints D is on the right.)
Piping joints(D)
Ink filter
(c) Fill the reservoir with new ink.
(d) Insert the tip of the print head into a beaker.
● Prepares for bending of the ink stream.
4
Refill the IJ printer with ink
● When Start/Continue is pressed on the screen shown below, refilling of the lines with ink
begins.
● After a while, ink is ejected from the nozzle. Check the position of the ink stream.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Process:Ink filter replacement
Operation guide
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Ink Drainage
Filter rep.
Ink refill
Confirm the ink filter is set at the right position.
Press [Start/Continue].
Abort
Start/Continue
● To abort the sequence, press the Abort key, and follow the on-screen instructions.
After aborting, you are returned to the "Circulation control" screen.
● When you have aborted the sequence, select the "Ink refill" from the "Circulation control"
screen and perform it.
● If the following message is output during ink refill, the system will automatically stop.
"Failure was detected in level sensor, pump or solenoid valve.
When ready, press Start/Continue ."
Press Start/Continue key, select "Ink refill" on "Circulation control" screen and execute refill.
If the same message appears again, contact your nearest local distributor.
●Replacing the ink filter 6-20
5
Open the Parts usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen), and set the Ink filter time to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
(hours)
Com=0
(hours)
Ink filter
00000
Pump
01000
Recovery filter
00000
01000
Heating unit
01000
Circulation filter
00000
01000
MV1
01000
Makeup filter
01000
MV2
01000
Air filter
01000
MV3
01000
MGV filter
01000
MV4
01000
R. Air filter
01000
MV5
01000
MV6
01000
MV7
01000
<Consumption>
Ink
001000
(ml)
MV8
01000
Makeup
001000
(ml)
MV9
01000
Print count
000001000
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
6-21 ●Replacing the ink filter
6.8 Replacing the recovery filter
● Do not perform this operation while ink is being ejected. Perform it after setting the IJ printer to the “Stop”
state.
1
Pull out the makeup reservoir.
Recovery filter
Makeup reservoir
Pull out
2
Rotate the lock nut of the recovery filter and pull it forward and out.
Lock nut
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
something similar.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped portion has
completely dried.
3
Remove the O ring and filter with tweezers and mount new ones.
O ring
Filter
4
Filter
O ring
Return it to its original state, and check to see that there is no leak of the ink in
operation.
* Tighten the nut securely by hand.
●Replacing the recovery filter 6-22
5
Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the Recovery filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
(hours)
Com=0
(hours)
Ink filter
00000
01000
Pump
01000
Recovery filter
00000
Heating unit
01000
Circulation filter
00000
01000
MV1
01000
Makeup filter
01000
MV2
01000
Air filter
01000
MV3
01000
MGV filter
01000
MV4
01000
R. Air filter
01000
MV5
01000
MV6
01000
MV7
01000
<Consumption>
Ink
001000
(ml)
MV8
01000
Makeup
001000
(ml)
MV9
01000
Print count
000001000
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
6-23 ●Replacing the recovery filter
6.9 Replacing the circulation filter
● Perform it a state in which the ink has been drained. The ink is not wasted if performed simultaneously with
the ink replacement.
1
Perform 2 -(a) to 2 -(c) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Perform from ink drainage to place the ink reservoir tube connection block back into position.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
2
Replace the circulation filter. See “6.8 Replacing the recovery filter” for the
replacement procedure.
Circulation filter
3
Perform 3 -(a) to 3 -(i) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Refill the IJ Printer with ink.
4
Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the time of the circulation filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
Com=0
(hours)
(hours)
Ink filter
00000
01000
Pump
01000
Recovery filter
00000
01000
Heating unit
01000
Circulation filter
00000
MV1
01000
Makeup filter
01000
MV2
01000
Air filter
01000
MV3
01000
MGV filter
01000
MV4
01000
R. Air filter
01000
MV5
01000
MV6
01000
MV7
01000
<Consumption>
Ink
001000
(ml)
MV8
01000
Makeup
001000
(ml)
MV9
01000
Print count
000001000
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
●Replacing the circulation filter 6-24
6.10 Adjusting the pressure
● Check the pressure before printing state check at the start of operation.
● Do not perform this operation in the Stop state. Perform it in the state in which ink is ejected.
1
Open the Operation management screen.
Operation management
[Ready
]
Com=0
Ink operating time
0000
(hours)
Ink alarm time
1200
(hours; standard value: 1200)
000000
(hours)
000000000
(prints)
Cumulative op. time
Print count
Ink, makeup
JP-K69, TH-TYPE A
Ink viscosity
100 (standard value:100)
Ink pressure
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
0.250 (MPa; standard value: 0.250)
Ambient temperature
Deflection voltage
Excitation V-ref.
Excitation frequency
20 (℃; range: 0〜45)
5. 7 (kV)
11 (0〜19)
68. 9 (kHz)
Back
2
Check the displayed ink pressure value. If there is a difference of 0.010 or more
from the standard value, adjust the pressure to the standard value ±0.002 with
a flat-blade screwdriver.
Pressure-reducing valve
To raise the pressure : rotate clockwise.
To lower the pressure : rotate counterclockwise.
6-25 ●Adjusting the pressure
6.11 Excitation V adjustment
(1) Overview
● The Excitation V set value is 0 to 19. The state of the ink drops is different for each setting.
● The optimum Excitation V set value must be input to maintain good print quality.
● Perform nozzle property test printing, and the center value of the range where printing is good is the optimum
Excitation V set value.
(Example) When printing is good at the Excitation V set value 5 to 15 range at nozzle property test, the
optimum Excitation V set value is the center value 10.
● Memorizes the ambient temperature when the Excitation V set value was updated as the reference ambient
temperature.
If the ambient temperature and the reference ambient temperature difference exceeds a certain value during
use, “Check Excitation V set value” warning will be generated. In that case, readjust the Excitation V setting.
(2) Operation
● For Excitation V setting, select the optimum set value from the result of test printing for each set value and
input the selected value from the operation panel. Perform operation in accordance with the following
procedure:
1
At the Maintenance menu, press Excitation V update (nozzle test) .
● The Excitation V update screen is displayed.
Displays the current set value.
Ambient temperature when the current set value is set
Excitation V update
Excitation V-ref.
[Standby
−
09
Ref. ambient temperature
23
(0〜19)
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
(℃)
HOME
Inc.
Automatic update
a
b
+
]
(1〜9)
Incremental change
1
Print trigger source
Button input
Print data
For test
Sensor
Data to be displayed
Perform nozzle property test and find the optimum excitation
Nozzle test
voltage value.
Back
2
Set a Print trigger source and b Print data of nozzle property test printing.
a Print trigger source
Select the timing at which printing is performed.
Print trigger source
Button input
Sensor
Prints at the print target sensor signal timing.
Prints by pressing Start printings on the operation panel.
●Excitation V adjustment 6-26
b Print data
Select the contents and conditions of the characters to be printed.
Print data
For test
Data to be displayed
Prints using the currently set print
description and print conditions.
Prints using the following test conditions:
・Number of lines
・Character size
・Inter-character space
・Character height
・Character width
・Ink drop use
・Print character description
3
: 1 line
: 12×16 dots
:1
: 99
:5
: 1/3
:■■nn123ABC
(nn: Excitation V set value)
Confirm that the IJ printer is in the Standby state and press Nozzle test .
● The Nozzle property test screen is displayed. The IJ printer enters the Ready to print state.
Nozzle property test
c
d
Excitation V-ref.
[Ready
−
09
Ref. ambient temperature
23
Automatic update
+
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
(0〜19)
(℃)
Inc.
Incremental change
1
Print trigger source
Button input
Print data
For test
(1〜9)
Sensor
Data to be displayed
Excitation V-ref. is printed on the print target.
[■■nn・・・・・・]
Abort
Printing starts at the press of [Start printings].
Start
printings
c Excitation V-ref.
Input the set value you want to print. (Set value is 00 to 19.)
Change the setting using − + or input a value by touching the number.
d Automatic update
Select whether or not to automatically switch to the next set value after printing one setting.
Disable : Set value does not change.
Dec.
: Set value is automatically decremented at each printing.
Inc.
: Set value is automatically incremented at each printing.
At “Inc.”, the change width by which the value is automatically switched is set.
6-27 ●Excitation V adjustment
4
Perform nozzle property test printing.
● When “Print trigger source” is
When “Print trigger source” is
, press Start printings .
, input the sensor signal.
Button input
Sensor
CAUTION
● During the nozzle property test, the state of creation of the ink drops may become
poor and an “Ink Drop Charge Too High” or other fault may be generated and the ink
may stop, depending on the Excitation V value.
In this case, after cleaning the print head, eject the ink again. (Refer to par. “3.1.2
When an error occurred at the start of operation” of the instruction manual and
perform the same work.)
The possibility of fault is high when Excitation V is set less than 5. When performing
test printing again, start from setting 10 and test print while decrementing.
5
Check the printed result.
● Check the Excitation V range at which printing is good. The center of that range is the optimum
value.
(Example) Printing good range 5 to 15→Optimum value 10
O: Good ×: Bad Space: Not checked
Ambient
Check date temperature
0
2015.07.07
6
Excitation V value
1
25 C
2
3
4
×
×
×
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
×
×
×
×
optimum
value
10
Update the Excitation V-ref. value.
(a) At the end of test printing, press [Abort] of the “Nozzle property test”
screen and return to the “Excitation V update” screen.
(b) Change “Excitation V-ref.” to the optimum value confirmed at step 5 .
Abort
Abort
Start
Change to optimum value.
Excitation V-ref.
−
10
Ref. ambient temperature
25
+
printings
(0〜19)
(℃)
Changes to current ambient temperature.
7
When the screen is returned to the “Maintenance menu” by Back
set value change is complete.
Back
,
CAUTION
● Repeat print setting is disabled during the nozzle property test.
Only one printing is performed by one input signal.
● Product speed matching setting is disabled during the nozzle property test.
The character width may be different from the actual character width.
●Excitation V adjustment 6-28
6.12 Ink drop state check method
● The state of the ink drops can be checked by using a magnifying glass.
● Perform this work in the Eject ink state.
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm water
and consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
1
Confirm that the IJ printer is in the Standby state and then remove the print
head cover.
Loosen the screw.
Pull out.
Print head cover
2
Using a magnifying glass, observe the ink drops in the charging electrode.
Magnifying glass
Deflection electrode
6-29 ●Ink drop state check method
Ink drops creation state confirmation table
Ink drop shape
Judgment
Name
Remarks
A mode
Good
B mode
Perfect
High-speed
small-diameter
mode
Two or fewer
small-diameter
drops
Allowable
Constant-speed
small-diameter
mode
Not
allowed
Low-speed
small-diameter
mode
Not
allowed
When the shape of the ink drops is not allowed, update to the optimum set value at par. “6.10 Excitation
V adjustment” and check again. Or contact your local distributor.
3
After the check, install the print head cover.
●Ink drop state check method 6-30
6.13 Draining ink from the main ink tank
● When the main ink tank full fault is generated, the ink cannot be drained by screen operation. Drain the ink
and refill with new ink as follows:
1
Remove the drain tube of the main ink tank as shown in the figure below and
drain the ink in the tank by approximately 50 ml. When ink is drained, put the
drain tube block to its original position.
Drain tube
Stop plug
Main ink tank
Drain tube
Beaker
Clean the tip of Drain tube by Makeup after
using IJ printer. If the tip of Drain tube was left
without cleaning, Drain tube would be clogged
and it might be difficult to get the ink drained.
2
Return the circulation system to its original state and display the Circulation
control screen and press the Ink refill → Start/Continue .
*Note that if operation is started without refilling the ink, a “Replenishment Time-out”
fault will be generated.
CAUTION
● If the ink is accidentally spilled, quickly wipe if off with wiping paper, etc.
In addition, do not close the maintenance cover until you confirm that the wiped part
is completely dry.
6-31 ●Draining ink from the main ink tank
6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump
● The operation confirmation of solenoid valve and pump is performed.
1 Supply valve
2 Replenishment valve
(MV1)
(MV2)
Recovery
valve
(MV3)
Agitation
valve
(MV4)
3
4
(MV6)
5 Circulation valve (MV5)
5 Pressure relief valve
7 Makeup valve
(MV7)
(MV8)
6 Cleaning valve
10 Pump
(MV9)
9 Shutoff valve
11 Viscosity meter
(MV10)
●If circulating system can not be operated due to no ink ejection, ink overflow from the gutter and such,
there are possibilities of solenoid valve or pump failure. Please perform operation test under service
personnel's guidance.
●In an operation state, only an operating state is displayed.
Different operations by state
Ink stop state
The operation confirmation of solenoid
valve and pump is performed( Operates
each valves individually ).
1
Except for Ink stop state
Displays operating state only.
Operating test such as open/close valve cannot
be performed.
At the maintenance menu, press Solenoid valve / pump test .
The solenoid valve / pump test screen is displayed.
Solenoid v/p test
[Stop
MV1
Open Close
MV2
Open Close
MV3
Open Close
MV4
Open Close
MV5
Open Close
MV6
Open Close
MV7
Open Close
MV8
Open Close
MV9
Open Close
Pump Oper- Stop
ated
Ink pressure
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Visco- Opermeter ated Stop
0.000 (MPa; standard value : 0.250)
Back
2
Press operation button.
The operating state of the solenoid valve and the pump is displayed.
(Confirm the operation by an operating sound.)
Open
: The solenoid valve is opened.
Close
: The solenoid valve is closed.
Operated : The pump is operated.
Stop
: The pump is stopped.
●Test of solenoid valve/pump 6-32
6.15 Long-term Shutdown
CAUTION
● A special work is required to perform the Long-term Shutdown procedure. It is
recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work. Should you
desire to conduct the work by yourself, the cautions must be fully understood
beforehand. It is recommended to contact the local distributor and ask for an advice
even you desire to conduct it by yourself, too.
● Even the Long-term shutdown is conducted, ink fixing may occur in the circulation
system depending on the ink or the storage temperature or the storage period.
It is strongly recommended to contact your local distributor and ask for the work
when you conduct "Startup process after long-term shutdown", especially in case the
storage temperature is high (30 degrees Celsius or more) or the storage period
exceeds 6 months.
● To secure safety, make sure to follow the procedures explained in "6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown.
● When the IJ Printer was left for a period of time without conducting Long-term
shutdown, make sure to follow the procedures explained in "6.15.2 Startup process
after long-term shutdown.
● In "6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown, should the circulation system be
operated continuously when the printer does not operate
normally, the pressure in the recovery line would be increased and it is going to be
dangerous. There is a possibility that the ink is ejected from the nozzle strongly or
the ink is reversely ejected from the gutter strongly. In such cases, stop the printer
operation immediately and contact the local distributor.
6-33 ●Long-term Shutdown
6.15.1 Process prior to long-term shutdown
(1) Overview
● This operation is the storage work performed when the IJ printer is shut down for exceeding the period
indicated in Table 1.
● The storage procedure for long-term shutdown is completed by draining the ink from the ink circulation
system and cleaning it with the makeup.
Table 1 Storage temperature and its period
Storage temperature
Shutdown Period Guideline *1
0 to 35 ℃
3 weeks
35 to 40 ℃
2 weeks
40 to 45 ℃
1 week
*1: Maximum period when the printer can be continuously shutdown without being operated.
● The figures in the table are for MEK-based ink.
● Handling of ink other than the above requires special handling in accordance with the handling
guidance of each ink.
CAUTION
1. Store the printer at a temperature as low as possible.
This operation is not necessary in case that the printer can be operated at least
once during the period indicated in Table 1. Follow Instruction manual "1.5 Cautions
on operating time when printer is in service" and Handling guidance of each ink as
to the operating time.
2. Even the process prior to long-term shutdown is conducted, ink fixing may occur in
the circulation system depending on the ink or the storage temperature or the
storage period.
3. If the printer was shutdown for a period mentioned above without conducting the
long-term shutdown, check the printer status in "6.15.2 Startup process after
long-term shutdown, 1 Operation check". If the problem exists, contact your local
distributor.
(2) Operating procedure
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm and
consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
●Long-term Shutdown 6-34
1
Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the
Process prior to long-term shutdown key and the Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
2
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
The following guidance appears. Confirm the message and Press
Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Always pay attention to the following before operation.
・Depending on the ink types, storage temperature or storage
term the clogging formed by residual ink the circulation system may occur even if this process is performed.
・For the storing method, it is recommended contact your
local distributor.
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
Abort
Start/Continue
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
3
Drain the Ink from the ink filter and ink circulation system.
(1) Perform 2 -(a) to 2 -(c) of the procedure in “6.3 Replacing the ink”.
● Perform from ink drainage to place the ink reservoir tube connection block back into position.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
(2) Return the direction of the ink filter so that connected tubes become the top.
4
Cleaning of the circulation system starts.
● Perform operation in accordance with the operation guide on the screen.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Remove the tube connection block from reservoir
and clean the end of it.
And then place the tube connection block in a beaker charged
with 50ml of makeup.
When ready, press <Start/Continue>.
6-35 ●Long-term Shutdown
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
(a) Drain the ink ejected into the beaker, clean the beaker and then put 50ml of the
makeup and a tube connection block into the beaker.
CAUTION
If ink is accidentally spilt, wipe it up
promptly with wiping paper or
equivalent.
In addition, do not close the
maintenance cover until you are
sure that the wiped area is
completely dried.
Beaker
Tube connection block
(b) Press Start/Continue .
● Auto cleaning in the circulation system starts.
(c) When the predetermined period of time elapses, the following operating guidance
appears.
Place the cap and tube connection block as they were, and place the ink reservoir
back in place.
● Be careful not to break the tube when mounting it into the printer.
Circulation control
[Service
]
Com=0
Process : Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Operation guide
Place the ink reservoir tube connection block back
into position..
When ready, press <Start/Continue>.
2015.07.07 12:45
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
InkDrainage
Systemclean
Proc. time : Approx. 6 minutes
Start/Continue
Proc. status: In progress
5
Repeat steps 3 to 4 once more time.
6
Mount the nozzle rubber seal.
(Perform the ink drainage to clean the circulation system three times in totall.)
● Mount the "nozzle rubber seal" between the charge electrode and the orifice plate.
CAUTION
1. Before installing the nozzle rubber seal, be sure to thoroughly clean it with the
makeup.
2. When installing the nozzle rubber seal, exercise care not to deform the charge
electrode.
The "Process prior to long-term shutdown" is now completed.
The circulation system is now charged with the makeup.
When starting up the printer after a long-term shutdown, be sure to perform the "6.15.2 Startup
process after long-term shutdown."
●Long-term Shutdown 6-36
6.15.2 Startup process after long-term shutdown
[Overview]
● This operation is the work for draining the makeup which cleaned the ink circulation system at "Process prior
to long-term shutdown" and the work for refilling it with the ink.
● To completely drain the makeup from the circulation system, you should charge the circulation system with
the ink, drain the ink, and refill the ink into the system.
● To secure safety, conduct " 1 Operation check" before "Startup after long-term shutdown".
CAUTION
Make sure to conduct " 1 Operation check" before "Startup after long-term shutdown".
If the printer does not operate normally after operation check, a special work is
required for restoration. Contact your local distributor. Should the circulation system
be operated continuously before normal operation is confirmed, the pressure in the
recovery line would be increased it is going to be dangerous. There is a possibility that
the ink is ejected from the nozzle strongly or the ink is reversely ejected from the gutter
strongly. In such case, stop the operation immediately and contact the local distributor.
1
Procedure of the operation check
WARNING
● Wear protective gear (goggles and mask).
● If the ink or makeup gets in your eyes or mouth, immediately rinse with warm and
consult a doctor.
● Perform work after confirming that there is no one in the ink ejection direction.
(Perform this work by inserting the print head tip into a beaker, etc.)
(a) Remove the nozzle rubber seal.
(b) Drain the makeup in the ink reservoir.
(c) Press "Solenoid valve/pump test" on Circulation maintenance screen to confirm
that each valve of MV1 to MV9 operates normally.
Refer to Technical manual "6.14 Test of solenoid valve/pump" for detail.
(It is operating normally if the solenoid valve gives out the operation sound.)
CAUTION
The solenoid valve maybe firmly fixed if the operational sound is not heard.
For restoration, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
(d) Execute “Solenoid valve/Pump Test” in Maintenance menu and
confirm if Viscometer works properly.
On the screen of “Solenoid valve/Pump Test”, if Red Indicator is
turned OFF when the button of “Viscometer” Operated is
pressed, and if Red Indicator is turned ON when the button of
“Viscometer” Stop is pressed, Viscometer is working properly.
Refer to the figure on the right for Red Indicator.
Viscometer
Red Indicator
CAUTION
Viscometer maybe clogged if Viscometer is NOT working properly. For restoration,
a special work is required. Contact your Local distributor.
For restoration, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
6-37 ●Long-term Shutdown
(e) Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the Ink stream alignment key and
then the Start/Continue key.
● Check if the ink stream is going into the gutter and it’s in the center of the gutter.
● Check whether the gutter absorbs the liquid.
CAUTION
If the ink is not being ejected, press Ink stream alignment key again. An ink fixing may
be caused if the ink is not ejected after Ink stream alignment is conducted two times.
An ink fixing may be caused if the suction of the liquid.
A special work is required for restoration. Contact your local distributor.
If the "Ink steam bending" occurs, refer to Technical manual "6.4 How to correct ink
stream bending and nozzle clogging" for restoration. If the ink stream bending is not
corrected, a special work is required. Contact your local distributor.
2
Operating procedure- "Process after long-term shutdown"
(a) Open the "Circulation control" screen, and press the
Process after long-term shutdown key then the Start/Continue key.
Circulation control
[Stop
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Eject ink
(Goes to Standby)
Cleaning stop
No-cleaning stop
HOME
Nozzle backwash
Recovery-line
cleaning
Ink replacement
Ink filter
replacement
Process prior to
long-term shutdown
Process after
long-term shutdown
Prev.Dsp. Next Dsp.
Ink circulation
Cancel
Makeup refill
Start/Continue
Select option; press [Start/Cont.]
Start/Continue
Proc. status:
(b) Follow the on-screen instructions for the operation.
● Repeat twice the same procedure as in "6.3 Replacing the ink".
(c) At the end of operation, screen returns to the Circulation control screen.
CAUTION
Put the end of print head into the beaker then press Ink refill key and Start/Continue
key. The ink will be ejected in a few minutes.
If the ink does not eject after pressing Ink refill key and Start/Continue key or "Ink
pressure low" or "No ink drop charge" is displayed, a special work is required for
restoration. Contact the local distributor near you.
●Long-term Shutdown 6-38
3
Open the "Operation management" screen. Arbitrarily rotate the handle of
Pressure-reducing valve clockwise/counterclockwise and check if the
pressure changes. After confirming the change, adjust the valve and set the
Ink pressure to standard setting with a tolerance of 0.002.
Operation management
[Ready
]
Com=0
Ink operating time
0000
(hours)
Ink alarm time
1200
(hours; standard value: 1200)
000000
(hours)
000000000
(prints)
Cumulative op. time
Print count
Ink, makeup
JP-K69, TH-TYPE A
Ink viscosity
100 (standard value:100)
Ink pressure
Ambient temperature
Deflection voltage
Excitation V-ref.
Excitation frequency
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
HOME
0.250 (MPa; standard value: 0.250)
20 (℃; range: 0〜45)
5. 7 (kV)
11 (0〜19)
68. 9 (kHz)
Back
CAUTION
A special work is required when the Ink pressure does not change by rotating the
handle of Pressure-reducing valve. Contact your local distributor.
The "Startup process after Long-term shutdown" is now completed.
6-39 ●Long-term Shutdown
7. MAINTENANCE SERVICE
● For the IJ printer to operate smoothly, the following maintenance work is necessary.
(1)Replacement of consumables
Replace the following filters according to the “Replacement guideline”.
No.
Consumable
Replacement guideline
Replacement procedure description
1
Ink filter
2,400h
"6.7 Replacing the ink filter"
2
Recovery filter
1,200h
"6.8 Replacing the recovery filter "
3
Circulation filter
2,400h
"6.9 Replacing the circulation filter "
4
Air filter
2,400h
Refer to the description below.
● In the case of standard operation (8 hrs/day, 25 days/month operation), 2400 hours corresponds to
1 year.
● The minimum retention period of IJ printer repair parts, including consumables, is 7 years after
discontinuation of manufacture.
● When ordering consumables, please specify the following order name and part code No.
No.
Consumable
Order name
Part code No.
Remarks
1
Ink filter
Filter capsule parts
451867
2
Recovery filter
Nozzle flat filter 75
451037
3
Circulation filter
PTFE filter 20 pack 2
451487
2 pcs/pack
4
Air filter
Air filter AF3 parts
451963
2 pcs/pack
(2) Other maintenance
a. About once a week, check whether or not the pump makes an abnormal sound (metal sound, etc.).
b. Before performing print state check at the start of operation, check whether or not the pressure is
suitable.
(See par. “6.10 Adjusting the pressure” for a description of the check procedure.)
c. For a description of ink drops and excitation voltage checks, see pars. “6.11 Excitation V adjustment” and “6.12 Ink drops state check method”.
(3) About periodic replacement parts
a. To use the IJ printer stably, clock battery, circulation system parts (pump, solenoid valve, etc) and
heating unit must be periodically replaced. Please consult your nearest local distributor.
●Maintenance service 7-1
Replacing the air filter
1 Trun off the power.
2 Loosen the knobs (thumb screws) and remove the intake fan cover.
Intake fan cover
Knob (thumb Screw)
3 Remove the old filter and set the new filter.
(Please set the new filter with red-mark being invisible.)
Air filter
Red-mark inside
4 Set the intake fan cover. (Turn the knobs until the intake fan cover comes into
contact with the printer.)
Printer
Turn the knob (Thumb screws) until comes into contact.
7-2 ●Maintenance service
5 Open the Part usage time mgmt. screen (menu 2 of the Circulation control
screen) and set the time of the air filter to “0”.
Parts usage time mgmt.
[Stop
]
(hours)
Com=0
(hours)
Ink filter
00000
01000
Pump
01000
Recovery filter
00000
01000
Heating unit
01000
Circulation filter
00000
01000
MV1
01000
Makeup filter
01000
MV2
01000
Air filter
00000
MV3
01000
MGV filter
01000
MV4
01000
R. Air filter
01000
MV5
01000
MV6
01000
MV7
01000
<Consumption>
Ink
001000
(ml)
MV8
01000
Makeup
001000
(ml)
MV9
01000
Print count
000001000
Update log
2015.07.07 12:45
HOME
2015/03/22 08:15
Back
●Maintenance service 7-3
About maintenance service
If trouble or damage occurs within 1 year after delivery or accumulated operating time of 2400 hours, whichever
is sooner, repairs will be made free of charge. However, the following cases are outside the warranty even within
the free warranty period:
(1) When trouble was due to handling outside the instruction manual
(2) When materials and parts other than ours, including the ink, were used and damage was caused by them
(3) When repair was performed by other than us or our designated representative and damage was caused by
this
(4) When trouble was due to external causes (abnormal print material, etc.) other than this equipment or by
moving or transportation of the equipment after delivery
(5) When operated in a usage environment outside the specifications of par. “12. Specifications” of the instruction manual.
(6) When damaged by fire, water, or other natural disaster
Loss of production due to down time and physical loss due to trouble or error of delivered equipment
(loss of print material, related facility, etc.) is outside the warranty. If trouble occurs, an engineer shall
be dispatched as quickly as possible and maximum efforts will be made so that the down time is as
short as possible.
If there is no danger of being misread, excessive or insufficient dot configuration shall be considered
allowable.
The IJ printer has an alarm function to prevent major printing faults before they happen, but this function does not inspect the quality of the printed characters.
Consideration shall be given so that the printed character state is visible at some process.
Parts retention period
The retention period of the performance parts for repair of this equipment is 7 years after discontinuation of
manufacture.
“Performance parts for repair” are parts necessary to maintain the functions of the product.
Customer memo:
Please fill in for later use.
Useful when communicating with the service in charge.
Tel:
Your Hitachi sales representative:
Person in charge:
Tel:
Your Hitachi distributor:
Person in charge:
Date of purchase:
7-4 ●Maintenance service
year
month
day
8. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Fig.8-1 Model RX2 IJ printer outside dimensions
8.1 Outside Dimensions
●Outside Dimensions 8-1
8-2 ●Outside Dimensions
Fig.8-2 Print head outside dimensions
Fig.8-3 Model RX2-S Electrical connection diagram
8.2 Electrical Connection Diagram
●Electrical Connection Diagram 8-3
8-4 ●Electrical Connection Diagram
Fig.8-4 Model RX2-B Electrical connection diagram
Fig.8-5 Model RX2 Circulation System diagram
8.3 Circulation System Diagram
●Circulation System Diagram 8-5
9. APPENDIX
Bar code, 2-dimensional code
● See “4.7.5 Print a bar code” and “4.14.3 Set various printing” in the Instruction Manual.
(1) Precautions when using EAN-13 code
● When bar code is “EAN-13” and “EAN-13 Add-On 5" the area for inputting the 2-digit “country code” is
displayed on the print format screen. Be sure to input the country code. The country code can be input at the
beginning of the data on the character input screen. See “4.14.3 Set various printing” in the Instruction
Manual.
● Guard bar, center bar and check code are automatically added.
Left barcode portion
Units
Guard position
bar of Prefix
code
First 5 digits of
the input data
Right barcode portion
Center
bar
Next 5 digits of
the input data
5 digits
5 digits
Check Guard
code
bar
1 digit
● When adding Readable code (number; human readable code), select either 5×5 or 5×7 as the size of the
numbers added.
Example of EAN-13 with
identification numbers
Example of EAN13 Add-On 5
with identification numbers
Conditions whereby Readable code can be added to be printed
No.
1
2
Condition
Made the number of lines of the EAN-13, EAN-8, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 Add-On 5
printing item 1 line or 2 lines.
Set character size 12×16, 18×24, or 24×32 (1 line only).
(2) Precautions when using EAN Prefix
●Whether to set bar code EAN-13, EAN-8, EAN-13 Add-on 5 country code by character input or print format
is selected.
Number of digits of bar code
Country code
Data
Check digit
Total number of digits
EAN-13
2
10
1
13
EAN-8
2
5
1
8
EAN-13
2
15
1
18
Add-On 5
EAN Prefix
Set value
Character input
Print format
Set by print format without
Country code is input at the head
Handling of country code
including country code in the
of the data.
data.
Print format screen
Country code is not displayed.
Set the country code.
For EAN-13, input 12 digits, for For EAN-13 input 10 digits, for
EAN-8, input 7 digits and for
EAN-8, input 5 digits and for
EAN-13 Add-On 5, input 17
EAN-13 Add-On 5, input 15
Edit message screen
digits, all including the country
digits, without including the
code.
country code.
However, check digit is
However, the check digit is
excluded.
excluded.
●When the country code is changed at the Print format screen, the country code for all the bar code items in
that message is changed to the same value.
9-1 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
(3) Precautions when using code 128
● The 2 modes include Code set B (Alphanumeric, numbers, symbols) and Code set C (numbers only).
The mode can be changed by pressing “Code B” or “Code C” on the keyboard.
● In the case of continuous numbers, the bar can be shortened by setting to code set C.
● When printing in 2 lines or more, only one “code 128" can be set for one column.
If you attempt to set more than one “code 128" for the same row, an “illegal bar code 2" error occurs.
●When code set was changed over, return to the original code set.
(Example)
1 Code set B: ABCD<C>0123<B>
2 Code set C: 0123<B>ABCD<C>45<B>EF<C>
↑
<B>, <C>: Code set changeover keys
Return to original
(4) Precautions when using DM code
● Set as shown below for print item to which DM is to be set:
(i) Number of lines : 1 line
(ii) Character size : 5×8, 12×16, 18×24
● Set barcode type on the print format screen.
Data matrix: Type of size and maximum character number
Character size
5×8
12×16
18×24
DM size
8×32 16×16 16×36 16×48 18×18 20×20 22×22 24×24
No. of vertical dots *Note 1
8
16
16
16
18
20
22
24
Numbers only
20
24
64
98
36
44
60
72
Alphabetical
10
12
32
49
18
22
30
36
characters only
Max. number
of characters Combination of
alphabetical
10-19 12-23 32-63 49-97 18-35 22-43 30-59 36-71
characters and
numbers
(The number of characters that can be coded differs according to the numbers/characters string.)
(Note 1) Use the number of vertical dots provided in the table for speed calculation.
[Rules for calculating number of digits]
Alphabetical characters are treated as one digit per character.
Single independent numbers are treated as one digit per number.
In the case of consecutive numbers, two numbers are treated as one digit.
If a single number is left over, it is treated as one digit.
The total is within 12 digits for 16×16 and within 10 digits for 8×32.
(Example 1) Basic calculation rule
A
B
C
3 characters =
3 digits
1
2
1 digit
3
4
5
1 digit
D
6
E
3 characters =
3 digits
Total 9 digits
1 digit
●Bar code, 2-dimensional code 9-2
(Example 2) Example of Character input for DM 16×16
Print contents
Number of characters Digit calculation result
Doable or not
(DM16×16)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
123456789012345678901234
1 digit ・・・・・・・・・・・・・
・・・ 1 digit
24 characters
12 digits
23 characters
12 digits
23 characters
13 digits
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1234567890123456789012A
1 digit ・・・・・・・・
・・・・
・・・・ 1 digit
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
123456789012345678901AB
1 digit ・・
・・・・・・
・・・・・・・・ 1 digit
Doable. Result is less
than or equal to
maximum of 12 digits.
Not doable.
Result exceeds
maximum of 12 digits.
● Input characters within the specified digit number for print item to which barcode has been set.
● When alphabet letters and numerals occur together number of characters which can be coded will vary
depending on character array.
● When “DM8×32” is used, set item “character size 1"on the user environment setup screen to “5×8”.
9-3 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
(5) Precautions when using QR Code and Micro QR
● Set as shown below for print item to which QR code or Micro QR is to be set:
(i) Number of lines : 1 line
(ii) Character size : 18×24, 24×32 (for QR code), 12×16 (for Micro QR)
● Set barcode type on the print format screen.
● Set error correction level on the various print setup screen.
For Micro QR, printing will be performed in error correction level M even if level Q selected.
QR code: Type of size and maximum character number
Character size
18×24
24×32
12×16
QR code size/Micro QR size
25×25
29×29
15×15
21×21
No. of vertical dots (for speed calculation)
21
25
29
15
Error correction level
M
Q
M
Q
M
Q
M
Numbers only
34
27
63
48
101
77
18
Capital alphabetical characters,
Max. number
20-29 16-22 38-58 29-43 61-96 47-72 11-15
numbers
of characters
Combination of alphabetical
14-29 11-22 26-58 20-43 42-96 32-72 7-15
characters, numbers and symbols
(The number of characters that can be coded differs according to the character string.)
● Input characters within the specified digit number for print item to which barcode has been set.
● When alphabet letters and numerals occur together number of characters which can be coded will vary
depending on character array.
●"QR code printing" is added on "User environment setup" screen. It makes users possible to select the
direction of QR code / Micro QR code to be printed.
●Please check if QR code / Micro QR code can be read properly by barcode reader before executing this
new function of "QR code printing".
Character
orientation
QR code printing
180-degree rotation
Printing example
Remarks
Rotated by 180 degrees
and printed.
0 or 1
Normal
Printed in normal
direction.
180-degree rotation
Printed in normal
direction.
2 or 3
Normal
Rotated by 180 degrees
and printed.
●Bar code, 2-dimensional code 9-4
(6) Precautions when using GS1 DataBar(Limited, Omnidirectional, Staced)
code
● Thirteen(13) characters can be inputted.
When a GS1 DataBar Limited is set, the heading character shall be 0 or 1 (zero or one).
● When adding Readable code (number; human readable code), select either 5×5 or 5×7 as the size of the
numbers added.
When GS1 DataBar with Human readable code is printed, the printed width will be bigger than that of
“without Human readable code”.
● Application Identifier(01) is automatically added to Human readable code.
● Please pay attention to the fact that there is an output of Application Identifier(01) or no output of
Application Identifier(01), depending on the barcode reader.
Example of GS1 DataBar (Limited)
with identification numbers
Example of GS1 DataBar (Omnidirectional)
with identification numbers
Example of GS1 DataBar (Stacked)
with identification numbers
Conditions whereby Readable code can be added to be printed
No.
Condition
1 Made the number of lines of the GS1 DataBar printing item 1 line or 2 lines.
In case of GS1 DataBar (Limited and Omnidirectional) :
Set either of character size 12×16, 18×24, or 24×32 (1 line only).
2
In case of GS1 DataBar (Stacked) :
Set character size 18×24 (1 line only)
9-5 ●Bar code, 2-dimensional code
Setting high-speed printing (Optional on RX2-S)
(1) Overview
● Three modes of HM, NM or QM can be selected.
By selecting the mode, high quality printing result can be ensured according to the line speed.
HM mode
NM mode
Remarks
HM mode is equivalent to particle use
percentage of 1/1.
In the 2-line print setting, NM mode is
equivalent to ink drop use percentage
of 1/1.5.
If the line speed remains the same,
print width in the NM mode will widen
by 1.5 times with respect to HM mode.
1 Necessary conditions to perform high-speed print
● When all necessary conditions from Nos. 1 to 7 are satisfied, high-speed print HM, NM or QM
mode can be selected.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item
Conditions
Number of lines of all columns is the same.
Print line
(Refer to Table in “ 2 Type of high-speed print and number of
vertical dots used” for number of print lines available.)
Character size of all print items is the same.
Character size
(Refer to Table in “ 2 Type of high-speed print and number of
vertical dots used” for character sizes available.)
Line spacing of all columns is the same. However, if Line spacing is
Line spacing
set to 3 or more, High-speed printing is NOT available.
Barcode
NOT available.
Character orientation 0 or 1.
Ink drop use rate
1/1
Ink drop charge rule Standard (Single scan or interlaced)
Print specifications
[Stop
Message name [
2nd screen
1st screen
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
]
3rd screen
M
90 (0〜99)
Character height
01 (1/1〜1/16)
Ink drop use
High-speed print
HM
NM
Manual
Startup
HOME
QM
Character width 0002 (0〜3999)
Printing method
1:ABC
←
ABC
0:ABC
→
2:
2(1:Single scan
←
ABC
Character
orientation
3:
→
2:Interlaced
High-speed print
Arrow : Printing direction
3:Mixed)
Edit
message
Print
format
Print start
delay
Change unit
Sensor
Print start delay
Print start
0000
(0〜9999)SC
Back
●Setting high-speed print (Optional on RX2-S) 9-6
2 Type of high-speed print and number of vertical dots used
● Number of vertical dots used in high-speed print is shown in Table below.
● When calculating printing preparation time, etc., pay attention to number of vertical dots.
Number of vertical dots used in the nozzle diameter is 65μm.
Ink drop use rate
1-line print
Character size 12×16
Character size 5×5
Character size 5×7
Character size 5×8
Character size 7×10
Character size 5×5
Character size 5×7
Character size 5×8
2-line print
3-line print
1/1
NM
24
15
21
24
30
20
28
32
HM
16
10
14
16
20
15
21
24
QM
25
35
40
1/2
32
20
28
32
40
30
42
48
Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
When you would like to make changes on the buttons, icons and status colors,
please contact your nearest local distributor.
(1) “Standby/Ready Change Button”
● When the Control Menu Buttons are available on the touch screen, “Standby/Ready Change Button” will be
displayed ([Disable] and [Enable]).
● When this button is used (i.e., Enabled), the number of button pressing can be reduced by one (1).
Standby/Ready Change Button
Standby/Ready Change Button
State
Disable
Enable
Standby
[standby
]
[
Standby
]
Ready
[Ready
]
[
Ready
]
Standby state (with button)
Print description
[
Message name[SAMPLE1
Standby
]
Com=0
] No. 1
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID:admin
《
》
M
Manual Shutdown
Ready state (with button)
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
《
9-7 ●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
[
Ready
] No. 1
]
Com=0
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID:admin
》
M
Manual Shutdown
● “Ready” state → “Standby” state switching
● With the conveyor interlock being activated by “Ready” signal, should this “Ready” signal be turned to
“Standby”, the conveyor will stop.
Ready
1 Press Ready
Then press OK .
and the message “Print Abort Confirmation” appears.
Press Ready.
[
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
Ready
]
] No. 1
Com=0
Current user ID:admin
《
》
184
=====
2015.07.07 12:45
M
Manual Shutdown
=====
Print Abort Confirmation
Printing will be aborted.
Solution Press <OK> to abort.
OK
Cancel
Press OK.
● “Standby” state → “Ready” state switching
1 Press Standby
Then press OK .
Standby
and the message “Print Confirmation” appears.
Press Standby.
Print description
Message name[SAMPLE1
[
Standby
] No. 1
]
Com=0
《
》
=====
183
2015.07.07 12:45
Current user ID:admin
Print Confirmation
M
Manual Shutdown
=====
The newly created print data will be printed.
Solution Press <OK> to print.
OK
Cancel
Press OK.
●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors 9-8
(2) Change of Icons
● The icons displayed on touch screen will be changed.
● With this change, the icons displayed on the screen can be seen easily.
● For icon type selection, please contact your local distributor.
● Icons displayed or not is set by “ICON Display” [Enable] or [Disable] on touch screen setup.
Supported Icons
Icon Type
Example
No.
Outline
Description
1
Default
Factory default
2
English
Icon + English language
3
Japanese
Icon + Japanese language
4
No Text
Icon only
Startup
<Example of Icon Type : ‘English’>
9-9 ●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors
Manual
1 line
(3) Change of Status Color
● The background color of IJP status will be changed.
● With this changes, the background color of “Ready” will be green which is the same color as the status
indicator light.
Background Colors of IJP Status
Status Color
State
Before Change
After Change
Stop
White
[Stop
]
Standby
Green
[Standby
]
Ready
Blue
[Ready
]
Starting
Green
[Starting
]
Light blue [Starting
]
Ink heating
Green
[Ink heating
]
Light blue [Ink heating
]
Stopping
Green
[Stopping
]
Light blue [Stopping
]
Drop adjust
Green
[Drop adjust
]
Light blue [Drop adjust
]
Cover open
Green
[Cover open
]
Light blue [Cover open
]
Service
Green
[Service
]
Light blue [Service
]
[
]
Fault
Red
Fault
White
[Stop
]
Light blue [Standby
Green
Red
[Ready
[
Fault
]
]
]
●Change of Buttons, Icons and Status Colors 9-10
Icon List
(1) Operation Control Buttons Group
Icon List 1 - Operation Control Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
1
Startup
2
Shutdown
3
Manual
4
Com=0
5
Com=1
6
HOME
7
Apply
Default
Icon
English Japanese No Text
(2) Common Buttons Group
No.
9-11 ●Icon List
Icon List 2 - Common Buttons Group
Icon
Button Name
Default
English Japanese
8
Decrement
9
Increment
10
Enter
11
Previous column
12
Next column
13
Previous item
14
Next item
15
Previous display
16
Next display
17
Back space
18
Delete
19
OK
20
Cancel
21
Back
No Text
(3) Keyboard Buttons Group
Icon List 3 - Keyboard Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
22
Change
23
Change V
24
ABC
25
123/Sign
26
Logo
27
Accent 1
28
Accent 2
29
Greek
30
Russian 1
31
Russian 2
32
Arabic 1
33
Arabic 2
34
Arabic number
35
Dedicated
36
Kana
37
Kana Convert
38
Pinyin Convert
39
Code Convert
Default
Icon
English Japanese
No Text
V
●Icon List 9-12
(4) Mini-Keyboard Buttons Group
Icon List 4 - Mini-Keyboard Buttons Group
No.
Button Name
40
ABC
41
123
42
Logo
43
Special 1
44
Special 2
45
Arabic number
46
Kana
Icon
Default
English
Japanese
No Text
(5) Print Format Screen Buttons Group
Icon List 5 - Print Format Screen Buttons Group
No.
9-13 ●Icon List
Button Name
47
1 line
48
2 lines
49
3 lines
50
4 lines
51
1st line
52
2nd line
53
3rd line
54
4th line
55
To overall
56
Delete column
57
Inset column
58
Add column
Icon
Default
English
Japanese
No Text
INDEX
2-Dimensional code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A
Air purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
ASCII codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32, 5-38
B
Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-18, 5-38, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1, 9-2, 9-4, 9-5, 9-6
Beaker with handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
C
Cable clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Cable seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 4-4
Calendar character code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Calendar conditions transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-23, 5-25
Character size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-27, 5-32, 5-46
5-47, 5-58, 9-1, 9-2, 9-4, 9-6
Circulation system environment setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Cleaning bottle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-3, 6-9, 6-12, 6-16
Cleaning stop. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Code128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18, 9-2
Count character code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Count conditions transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-24, 5-26
Create new user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
Current time output transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35, 5-36, 5-53
D
Data matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51, 5-52, 5-54, 5-55, 9-2
Date/time setup transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35, 5-36
Delete user ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
E
EAN prefix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13, 5-46, 9-1
EAN-13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1
Eject ink (Goes to Standby) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Exhaust duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3
EZJ127 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-7, 4-13, 4-14, 4-24
F
Free layout transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1, 5-19, 5-21
G
Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1, 4-2, 4-6, 6-1
GS1 DataBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
H
High-speed printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14, 5-16, 5-46, 5-59, 9-1
●Index 9-14
I
Ink circulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Ink drainage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-19
Ink filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17, 6-19, 7-1
Ink filter replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17
Ink refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-4, 6-8, 6-20, 6-31
Ink replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-3, 6-4, 6-5
Ink stream alignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10, 6-13, 6-14
Inter-character space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-27, 5-28, 5-29, 5-30, 5-42, 5-46
Item number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-7, 5-12, 5-46, 5-58
L
Line count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-46, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54
Line spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13, 5-14, 5-17, 5-46, 9-6
Login management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3, 3-9
M
Magnifying glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-22
Makeup filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 6-21, 6-23, 7-1
Makeup refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-17
Message name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10, 5-11, 5-46
Mini Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
N
No-cleaning stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Nozzle backwash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-9, 6-10, 6-11
Nozzle property test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26, 6-27, 6-28
Nozzle seal plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Nozzle tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
O
On-line/Off-line transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-33, 5-55
Open collector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-8, 4-9, 4-13, 4-14, 4-18, 4-19, 4-22
Overwrite-enabled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-49, 5-53, 5-54, 5-62
Overwrite-protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-37, 5-48, 5-53, 5-54
P
Parts usage time management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Periodic replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Plastic bag with zipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Pressure relief. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-32
Print condition transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-3, 5-12, 5-18, 5-61
Print data recall transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-9, 5-66, 5-67
Print data registration transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-10, 5-11
Print head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, 4-1, 4-2, 6-7, 6-9, 6-10, 6-13, 6-26, 8-3
Print head cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1, 2-2
Printings transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1, 5-3, 5-7, 5-8, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-62, 5-66, 5-67
Product speed matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13, 4-14, 4-15, 4-16, 4-20, 5-15, 5-16, 5-46, 5-61, 6-28
9-15 ●Index
Q
QR code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51, 5-52, 5-54, 5-55, 9-4
R
Recovery filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2, 6-22, 6-24, 7-1
Recovery-line cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3, 6-16
Remote operation transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-34
T
t=async. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54
t=fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3, 5-51, 5-52, 5-53, 5-54, 5-63
Terminal block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-5, 4-6
Time control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2, 5-35, 5-36, 5-47
Totem pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6, 4-8, 4-13, 4-14
Transmission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37, 5-38
Tweezers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-9
U
User conditions setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2, 3-3, 3-9
User pattern character transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2, 5-26, 5-32
Using environment setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2, 3-3, 3-9, 3-10
W
Wide mouth bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Wiping paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1, 6-1, 6-7, 6-17, 6-22, 6-31, 6-36
●Index 9-16
2-L3009-4B

Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Hitachi hb b100 инструкция на русском хлебопечка
  • Hitachi dc inverter nano titanium инструкция
  • Hitachi da300e инструкция по эксплуатации
  • Hitachi cg31ebs инструкция на русском
  • Hitachi cg27ej s инструкция на русском